JP2019042223A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine adopting a concept of creating a game progress state advantageous to a player and capable of realizing further innovative game characteristics.SOLUTION: A game machine has a normal game state and a specific game state (e.g. time-saving game state) in which game balls enter a second start opening more easily than in the normal game state. In the specific game state, a BGM selection screen for changing BGM output from a speaker can be displayed on a performance display device. While the BGM selection screen is displayed, on the basis of the fact that an operation member is operated, the BGM output from the speaker can be changed. In a specific performance period in the specific game state, the BGM output from the speaker can be changed, on the basis of the fact that the operation member is operated, even though the BGM selection screen is not displayed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 50

Description

  It relates to gaming machines.

  As a recent pachinko game machine, a big hit lottery with a predetermined probability is made when a game ball enters the starting opening on the game board surface (game area), and if the big hit lottery is won, The mainstream is pachinko gaming machines that transition to the state and can open a large winning opening provided on the game board surface to obtain a large number of prize balls. Within the pachinko gaming machine configured in this way, there is a probability-changing gaming state that increases the winning probability in the jackpot lottery and a time-reducing gaming state that increases the efficiency of symbol variation for notifying the lottery result in the jackpot lottery There is also a gaming machine that enhances the interest of the game by creating a game progress state that is advantageous to the player by these game states. And in order to enhance the effect effect by sound, there is a structure in which a player can select a music to be played by operating an operation member, and further enhance the fun of the game.

JP 2009-066644 A

  However, since there are many such gaming machines, there is a problem that it is desired to develop a model that can realize further innovative gaming properties.

The gaming machine according to this aspect is
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An effect display device (for example, an effect display device SG) that displays a predetermined effect as the game progresses;
A speaker (for example, speaker D24) that outputs a predetermined effect sound in accordance with the progress of the game;
An operation member (for example, sub input button SB, cross key SB-2) that can be operated by the player,
Having a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state) that makes it easier to enter the second starting port than the normal gaming state,
In the specific game state, a BGM selection screen for changing BGM {eg, BGM (Back Ground Music), music} output from the speaker can be displayed on the effect display device.
In a situation where the BGM selection screen is displayed, the BGM output from the speaker can be changed based on the operation member being operated.
In the specific effect period in the specific game state, the BGM output from the speaker can be changed based on the operation member being operated even though the BGM selection screen is not displayed. It is a gaming machine to play.

  According to the gaming machine according to this aspect, it is possible to realize further novel gaming characteristics in the gaming machine that adopts the concept of creating a game progress state that is advantageous to the player.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is an operation diagram of the sub input button and the lever in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a channel configuration image diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of main processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of NMI interruption processing (at power interruption) on the main control board side in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of prize ball payout command transmission control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the payout control board transmission control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is an image diagram relating to a prize ball payout command and payout related information on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the payout control board reception control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the entrance detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game start-entry ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the main game starting entrance entrance detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the first (second) big prize opening entrance detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of a general winning opening entrance detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of discharged ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of out-entry ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the winning ball number determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of fraud detection information management processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of error management processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of a firing control signal output process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of external signal output processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of management operation control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is a management menu screen display image diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the power saving mode switching control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of non-game period control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the customization control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the customization guidance screen display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 42 is a customization guidance screen image diagram 1 in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the customization execution display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 44 is a customization guidance screen image diagram 2 in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the customization control process during game on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of music selection processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the big hit song selection process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the music selection process in the auxiliary gaming state on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 49 is a music selection screen image diagram 1 (during a big hit) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 50 is a music selection screen image diagram 2 (short and medium) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 51 is a music selection screen image diagram 3 in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is a music list in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 53 is a music transition diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of effect operation content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 57 is an effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of button effect execution processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of a single press effect execution process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of a continuous hit effect execution process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 62 is a flowchart of long press effect execution processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 63 is an image of automatic button operation execution in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 64 is a flowchart of hidden button effect execution processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 65 is a hidden button effect image diagram 1 in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 66 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 67 is a flowchart of background image display processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 68 is a flowchart of electric lamp operation control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 69 is an electrical decoration table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the volume control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 71 is a volume determination table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 72 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the present embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of non-game period control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the present embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of a right-handed instruction display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the present embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the continuous hit effect execution process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the present embodiment. FIG. 76 is an example of display priority applicable to this example. FIG. 77 is a hidden button effect image 2 in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 78 is a hidden button effect image diagram 3 in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 79 is a hidden button effect image 4 in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 80 is a hidden button effect image diagram 5 in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 81 is a customization guidance screen image diagram 3 in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 82 is an example of an auto-strike effect in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 83 is a game flow in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 84 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 85 is a music selection screen image diagram 4 (small hits in a short time) in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 86 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 87 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 88 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 89 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the special game is completed on the main control board side in the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 90 is a volume transition diagram in the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 91 is a usage example of a button image in the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment.

Form to carry out

  First, the meaning of each term in this specification will be described. “Pitching” includes not only winning a prize ball to be paid out, but also passing to a “through chucker” without winning a prize ball. The “identification information” may be in any form as long as the type of information can be identified through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but is preferably visual, for example, numbers, letters, designs. The thing with the shape of etc. can be mentioned. In this specification, “identification information” may be called a main game symbol / special symbol (special symbol) or a decorative symbol (design), but the “special symbol (special symbol)” is the main control board. The “decorative pattern (design)” is identification information as an effect displayed on the sub-control board side. “Displaying identification information” is not limited to a display method. For example, light emission of a light emitting means (for example, liquid crystal, LED, 7-segment) (including not only whether light is emitted but also a color difference), physical Display (for example, a symbol drawn on a reel band is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position). “Direction” refers to display content that enhances the fun of the game. For example, identification information fluctuates / stops, notices, etc., moving images such as animation and live action, still images such as pictures, photos, characters, etc. Combinations can be mentioned. “Open state, open state” and “closed state, closed state” are, for example, in the configuration of a general big prize opening (so-called attacker), open state = easy-to-win state and closed state = non-winning state Easy state. Also, for example, a state protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as advance state) and a state of being retracted into the game board (side opposite to the player side) (hereinafter referred to as retreat state) In a configuration (so-called velo-type attacker) that can take the following condition, the advance state = easy-to-win state and the evacuation state = non-easy-to-win state. “Random number” is a random number used in a lottery (lottery by an electronic computer) to determine some game content in a pachinko game machine, and includes a pseudo-random number in addition to a random number in a narrow sense (for example, a hard- Random numbers and soft random numbers as pseudo-random numbers). For example, the so-called “basic random numbers” that affect the outcome of the game, specifically, “winning random numbers (random numbers for success / failure lottery)” related to the transition of special games, and the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol "Variation mode determination random number" for determining, "symbol determination random number" for determining a stop symbol, "hit symbol determination random number" for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game, etc. be able to. It is not necessary to use all these random numbers when determining the contents of the variation mode, the contents of the definite identification information, etc., and it is sufficient to use at least one random number that is the same or different from each other. Also, in this specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, but one entry (for example, starting entrance) that triggers the acquisition of random numbers. The random number obtained by entering the ball is referred to as one (ie, in the above example, the random number bundle of winning random number + variation mode determining random number + design determining random number... Is referred to as one random number) . Further, for example, a kind of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another kind of random number (for example, a symbol determination random number). “Game state” means, for example, a transition to a special game state rather than a non-stochastic game state in which a lottery probability for transition to a special game state or a special game state in which a special winning opening can be in an open state is a predetermined value. A probabilistic variable gaming state with a high lottery probability, an auxiliary gaming state with assistance for winning at the starting port that becomes a lottery opportunity for special games (so-called normal symbol short-time state, for example, a variable member is attached to the starting port In such a case, the variable member may be one or a combination of a plurality of combinations such as a long opening period of the variable member, a high probability of winning the opening of the variable member, and a short notification time of the result of the variable member opening lottery. “Adjusting the volume level” means changing all the volumes including the maximum volume that can be output. For example, when the maximum volume is changed from “90 dB” to “80 dB” by adjusting the volume level. For example, the volume that is output in a situation where the maximum volume is reached, such as during a super reach production, changes from “90 dB” to “80 dB”, and the volume that is output during the variation of the decorative pattern that does not cause reach variation is “50 dB”. The maximum volume and the volume that is not the maximum volume are changed by adjusting the volume level. “Adjusting the light amount level” means changing all light amounts including the maximum light amount that can be output. For example, the maximum light amount is changed from “luminance 10” to “luminance 7” by adjusting the light amount level. In this case, the amount of light in the situation where the maximum amount of light is present during super reach production is changed from “brightness 10” to “brightness 7”. For example, the maximum light amount and the light amount that is not the maximum light amount are changed by adjusting the light amount level. The “automatic operation state” is a state in which the auto button operation setting is on, and a state in which a cut-in effect or the like is executed without operating the sub input button SB or the lever SB-3 during the button effective period. ing. The “non-automatic operation state” is a state in which the auto button operation setting is off, and the cut-in effect or the like is not executed unless the sub input button SB or the lever SB-3 is operated during the button effective period. Yes.

  The following embodiment is a model in which two conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machines are mixed (type 1 type 1 complex machine). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applicable to other game machines (for example, conventional 1st type, 2nd type, 3rd type, general pachinko game machines such as general electric roles). . Note that this embodiment is merely an example, the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of flag on / off, the name of the means responsible for each step, etc. It is not limited to the following aspects. In addition, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be understood as being limited to being applied to specific items, and may be in any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification example of an embodiment is a modification example of another embodiment, and even if one modification example and another modification example are described independently, there is the modification example. It should be understood that a combination of the modified example and another modified example is also described. In the present embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be a reference table or vice versa. In addition, in this example, “table” is not limited to the format, and one or more selection candidates are selected from a plurality of selection candidates based on one or more information. It should be understood that this is an associated mode. Furthermore, numerical values (for example, winning probability at the time of lottery execution, maximum number of rounds at the time of special game, symbol variation time, number of continuations in each gaming state, etc.) as specific examples shown in the following embodiments and modifications are as follows: This is merely an example, and in particular, under different conditions (for example, according to the condition of the first main game side and the second main game side, by the condition of the probability variation game and the non-probability variation game, by the time shortening game and non- It is understood that the magnitude relations and combinations of the numerical values shown in the conditions for time-saving games, etc.) may be changed as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the following embodiments and modified examples. Should. For example, on the first main game side and the second main game side, the magnitude relationship between the winning probability at the time of the lottery execution and the expected value of the maximum number of rounds at the time of the special game is as follows: first main game side = second main game side Even if it is illustrated as such, the magnitude relationship may be changed as appropriate so that the first main game side <the second main game side, or the first main game side> the second main game side, etc. Good (same for other values and conditions). Also, for example, when configuring based on the intention that the probability variation gaming state will continue until the next jackpot occurs, whether to set “65535” as the number of continuations (configure to continue substantially), Or, even in the options of the realization method based on the same purpose, such as maintaining the probability variation game state until the next jackpot occurs without setting the number of continuations, as long as it does not greatly deviate from the purpose of the following embodiments and modification examples Should be understood as appropriate.

  Here, before describing each component, the characteristics (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko gaming machine is mainly composed of a gaming machine frame and a gaming board D35. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

  First, the gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper ball dish D20, a lower ball dish D22, and a launch handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame for fixing the pachinko gaming machine to a position where it should be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame body aligned with the opening portion of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so as to be opened and closed. The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for launching a game ball, a mechanism for detachably storing the game board D35, a mechanism for guiding or collecting the game ball, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is made of glass or the like and supported by the door D18. The door D18 is attached to the front frame D14 through a hinge mechanism (not shown) so as to be opened and closed. The upper ball tray D20 has mechanisms for storing game balls, sending out the game balls to the launching rail, and extracting the game balls to the lower ball tray D22. The lower ball tray D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Speakers D24 are provided at the upper right and upper left of the game board D35, and sound effects corresponding to the game state and the like are output.

  The gaming board D35 and the transparent plate D16 (for example, a glass board) on the front of the gaming machine are attached to the gaming machine frame so as to be parallel to each other while maintaining a distance exceeding 13 mm and not exceeding 25 mm (19 mm in this example). It has been. Here, the game board D35 is firmly fixed by a fixing mechanism (not shown) so as not to be easily shaken.

  Further, the transparent plate D16 (for example, a glass plate) does not hinder the prospect of the entire structure of the game board, and the entire game area is colorless and transparent so that the position of the game ball on the game board can be confirmed. Is formed.

  In the ball tray (for example, the upper ball tray D20 and the lower ball tray D22), the game balls on the ball tray are visible to the player (the number of game balls can be almost confirmed), and the game received by the player in the tray It has a shape that does not hinder the removal of the ball (a shape that allows the game ball to be freely removed).

  Next, the game board D35 has a game area D30 defined by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34, and a game ball flowing down on the game board D35 (on the game area D30) via the transparent plate D16. The position of can be confirmed. The game area D30 is roughly divided into a left-handed area DL10 and a right-handed area DR10. The game area D30 includes a left-handed route ML10, a right-handed route MR10, a first main game start port A10, a second main game, as well as a plurality of unillustrated mechanisms such as a game nail and a windmill and various general winning ports. Start opening B10, auxiliary game start opening H10, first big prize opening C10, second big prize opening C20, first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20, production display device SG, auxiliary game symbols A display device H20, a center ornament D38, a movable body accessory YK, a right general winning port lamp LP10, a left general winning port P10, a right general winning port P20, a sub input button SB and an out port D36 are installed. In the present embodiment, the left-handed route ML10 may be referred to as a first downstream route, and the right-handed route MR10 may be referred to as a second downstream route. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail.

  Next, the first main game start opening A10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start opening A10 includes a first main game start opening entrance detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball into the first main game start entrance A10, and the first main game start that indicates the entrance at the time of entrance. The entrance ball information is generated.

  Next, the second main game start opening B10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the second main game. Specifically, the second main game start port B10 includes a second main game start port entrance detection device B11s and a second main game start port electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball to the second main game start entrance B10, and the second main game start that indicates the entrance at the time of entrance. The entrance ball information is generated. Next, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is changed between a closed state in which a game ball is difficult to win in the second main game start port B10 and an open state in which the game ball is more likely to win than the closed state.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are provided, and the game ball flowing down the left side (left-handed region DL10) of the game region D30 is the first. While being easily guided to the main game start opening A10, the game balls flowing down the right side (right hit area DR10) of the game area D30 are configured not to be guided to the first main game start opening A10. Further, both the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 can be guided to the second main game start opening B10.

  In the present embodiment, the electric combination is provided on the second main game start opening B10 side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric combination is provided on the first main game start opening A10 side. May be. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are arranged so as to overlap, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game start port A10 and the first main game start port A10 The two main game start ports B10 may be spaced apart.

  Next, the auxiliary game start port H10 includes an auxiliary game start port entrance detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start port entrance detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball to the auxiliary game start port H10, and generates auxiliary game start port entrance information indicating the entrance at the time of entrance. To do. Note that the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port H10 triggers a lottery to expand the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10.

  Here, in this embodiment, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the auxiliary game start port H10, and the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). The game ball that flows down is configured not to be guided to the auxiliary game start port H10. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game balls flowing down the right side and the left side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) may be configured to be guided to the auxiliary game start port H10.

  Next, the left general winning opening P10 includes a left general winning opening entering device P11s. The left general winning entry entrance detection device P11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the left general winning entry P10, and generates left general winning entry entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. In addition, a predetermined number (for example, 3 balls) of game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls enter the left general winning opening P10. Note that a game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) can easily enter the left general winning opening P10, and a game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) is left. It is configured so that it is difficult to enter the general winning opening P10. That is, when a left strike is performed (the game ball is launched by adjusting the firing strength of the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left strike area DL10 (left strike route ML10) on the left side of the game area D30). It is configured to easily enter the left general winning opening P10.

  Next, the right general winning opening P20 includes a right general winning entry entrance detecting device P21s. The right general winning opening entrance detection device P21s is a sensor that detects the entering of a game ball into the right general winning opening P20, and generates right general winning opening entrance information indicating the entering at the time of entering. Here, the right general winning opening P20 is arranged in the right-handed area DR10, and has both the role of an auxiliary game starting port for acquiring auxiliary game random numbers and the role of a general winning port for paying out prize balls. Yes. In other words, the right general winning opening entrance detection device P21s serves as both an auxiliary game start opening sensor described later and a general winning opening sensor described later. In other words, the game ball entering the right general winning opening P20 triggers a lottery to expand the second main game start port electric accessory B11d attached to the second main game start port B10. In addition, a predetermined number (for example, two balls) of game balls are paid out as prize balls by entering the game balls into the right general winning opening P20. A game ball (for example, two balls) paid out as a prize ball from the right general prize opening P20 by entering a game ball into the right general prize opening P20 is entered by entering a game ball into the left general prize opening P10. The number of game balls (for example, 3 balls) to be paid out as prize balls from the left general winning opening P10 is reduced. In the present embodiment, the right-handed game ball is configured to enter the right general winning opening P20. That is, when a right strike is performed (the game ball is launched by adjusting the firing strength of the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right strike region DR10 (right strike route MR10) on the right side of the game region D30). It is configured to easily enter the right general winning opening P20.

  Here, in this embodiment, as the entrance that can enter when the right hand is executed, in order from the upstream, “auxiliary game starting entrance H10 → right general winning entrance P20 → second big winning entrance C20 → The order is “first grand prize opening C10 → second main game starting port B10 → out port D36”. In addition, since the auxiliary game start opening H10 has a gate shape, the game ball that has passed through the auxiliary game start opening H10 will further flow down on the game area, and the downstream entrance hole (the right side described above) A general winning opening P20 or the like) can be entered. On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the right general winning opening P20 flows into the back side of the game board surface, and does not enter the first major winning opening C10 or the second major winning opening C20 thereafter (right-handed execution is performed). Thus, game balls that have not entered the right general winning opening P20 can enter the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20).

  When left-handed in the non-time-reduced gaming state is executed (in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the game is advanced by left-handed), a game ball enters the auxiliary game starting port H10 (and the right general winning port P20). However, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is difficult to open, and the game will proceed mainly by entering the first main game start port A10 as the start port on the main game side, When right-handed in the time-reduced gaming state (when the right-handed game is advanced in the time-reduced gaming state), the game ball easily enters the auxiliary game starting port H10 (and the right general winning port P20). The 2 main game start opening electric accessory B11d is easy to open, and the game is progressed mainly by entering the second main game start opening B10 as the start opening on the main game side. Also, it is easier to enter the first main game start opening A10 when the game ball is continuously left-shot in the non-time-reduced game state, and the game ball is fired right-hand in the time-reduced game state. If the game is continued, it is easier to enter the second main game start port B10. In other words, the first main game start when the game ball is continuously left-shot in the non-time-reduced game state. Rather than the ease of entering the mouth A10 or the second main game starting port B10, the first main game starting port A10 or the second main game starting when the game ball is continuously fired by right-handed in the time-saving gaming state The ease of entering the mouth B10 is higher. Therefore, in this example, the number of award balls (three balls in this example) when entering the left general winning opening P10 that is easier to enter in the left-handed execution than in the right-handed execution is calculated as right-handed. By designing more than the number of winning balls (two balls in this example) when entering the right general winning opening P20 that is easier to enter than when performing left-handed, the non-time-saving gaming state The difference in the average number of winning balls that are paid out by entering the winning opening between the case where the game is advanced by left-handed and the case where the game is advanced by right-handed in the time-saving gaming state, that is, the base It is possible to prevent the difference between the values (the expected value of the number of prize balls to be paid out with respect to 100 launched game balls in a situation where a special game is not won) from becoming too large.

  The right general winning opening lamp LP10 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal, an LED, and the like, and is configured to be lit when a game ball enters the right general winning opening during execution of a special game. . Further, it is configured to suggest whether to shift to the probability variation gaming state or the non-probability variation gaming state after the special game is ended due to the difference in lighting color of the right general winning award lamp LP10. Specifically, it is easy to light red when the probability-variable gaming state is reached after the end of the special game being executed, and blue when it is non-stochastic variable gaming state after the end of the special game being executed. By configuring easily, it can be configured such that “red: a high expectation level in the probability-changing gaming state after completion of the special game, blue: low expectation level in the probability-changing gaming state after the completion of the special game”. Note that three or more types of lighting colors may be provided as the lighting colors of the right general winning opening lamp LP10. The right general winning opening lamp LP10 may be provided in the left-handed region DL10 or in the right-handed region DR10 on the game region D30. Further, it may be provided in an area other than the game area D30. In this example, the non-stochastic game state is set to normal state, normal game state, normal time, low probability, low probability state, low probability game state, low probability, non-probability change, low probability lottery state, low probability May be referred to as medium, normal, low probability, non-probability, etc. In addition, the probability variation gaming state may be referred to as a high probability, a high probability state, a high probability gaming state, a high probability, a probability change, a high probability lottery state, a high probability, a probability change, or the like. In addition, the time-saving gaming state may be referred to as a time-saving state, a time-shortening, a time-shortening, a high base, an electric support, etc. Further, the non-time-saving game state may be referred to as a non-time-short state, a non-time-short medium, a non-time-short time, a low base, a non-electric support, or the like. Further, the non-stochastic game state and the non-time-reduced game state may be referred to as a normal state, a normal game state, a normal time, a normal mode, or the like.

  The game balls that have flowed down the right-handed route MR10 pass through the right-handed route outlet D50 and flow down to the vicinity of the right general winning port P20, the first big winning port C10, the second big winning port C20, and the like. It will be.

  Next, a first grand prize opening C10 and a second big prize opening C20 are provided at the upper right of the out mouth D36, and the game balls flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) Before reaching the out opening D36, it is configured to easily pass through an area where the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 are arranged.

  Next, the first grand prize winning opening C10 is a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is stopped. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, located on the upper right side of D36. As a specific configuration, the first grand prize opening C10 includes a first grand prize opening prize detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a first grand prize opening electrical accessory C11d {and a first grand prize prize. The mouth electric accessory solenoid C13}. Here, the first grand prize opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big prize opening C10. Is generated. The first grand prize opening electric accessory C11d changes the first big prize opening C10 to the first big prize opening C10 in a normal state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win (first). 1 big prize opening electric accessory solenoid C13 is excited and varied). In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a mode in which a horizontal rectangular shape is formed and the game ball is variable between a normal state where the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to. In that case, for example, an aspect (so-called, a state where the bar-like member provided in the special winning opening is in a state of protruding to the player side and a retracted state of being retracted to the player side) As a mode (so-called slide type attacker) that can take a state where the opening on the passage where the game ball can roll is a big prize opening and the opening is closed or opened. Well, it is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the special winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the second grand prize opening C20 is formed in a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, located on the upper right side of the opening D36. Specifically, the second grand prize opening C20 includes a second big prize opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a second big prize opening electric accessory C21d {and a second big prize. An electric mouthpiece solenoid C23}. Here, the second grand prize opening prize detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big prize opening C20, and the second big prize opening entry information that indicates the entry at the time of entry. Is generated. The game balls that have entered the second grand prize opening C20 are configured to be detected by the second big prize opening prize detection device C21s. Next, the second big prize opening electric accessory C21d has the second big prize opening C20 in the second big prize opening C20 in a normal state where a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. Make it variable. In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a mode in which a horizontal rectangular shape is formed and the game ball is variable between a normal state where the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to. In that case, for example, an aspect (so-called, a state where the bar-like member provided in the special winning opening is in a state of protruding to the player side and a retracted state of being retracted to the player side) (Bello-type attacker) or an opening on a passage where a game ball can roll is used as a big prize opening, and the opening can be closed or opened (so-called slide-type attacker). It is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the big winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game symbol). It is a device that executes the display and the like. Specifically, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) includes a first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) and a first main game game. And a symbol hold display portion A21h (second main game symbol hold display portion B21h). Here, the first main game symbol hold display portion A21h (second main game symbol hold display portion B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps is the first main game (second main game). This corresponds to the number of random numbers held (the number of main game symbols that have not been executed). The first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) is configured with, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is “0” to “9”. ”Is displayed with 10 types of numbers and“ − ”of losing {but not limited to this, a 7-segment LED is set so that it is difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed. It is preferable to use and display with symbols or the like. In addition, the hold number display is not limited to being composed of four lamps, but can be configured to display a maximum of four hold numbers (for example, composed of one lamp, (Equation 1: lighting, hold number 2: slow blink, hold number 3: medium blink, hold number 4: fast blink)).

  Since the main game symbol does not necessarily have an effect role, in the present embodiment, the size of the first main game symbol display device A20 is set to be inconspicuous. However, in the case of adopting a technique in which the main game symbol itself has an effect role and does not display the decorative symbol, the main game symbol is displayed on a liquid crystal display such as an effect display device SG described later. You may comprise.

  Next, the effect display device SG is a device that executes display of an effect image including a decorative symbol that fluctuates and stops in conjunction with the main game symbol. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 where an effect is executed including a variable display of decorative symbols. Here, the display area SG10 includes, for example, a decorative symbol display area SG11 that displays a moving image of a plurality of rows of decorative symbol fluctuations simulating a game of a slot machine, a first hold display portion SG12 that displays main game hold information, and And a second hold display part SG13. The effect display device SG is configured with a liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, but may be configured with other display means such as a mechanical drum or LED. Next, each of the first hold display part SG12 and the second hold display part SG13 includes four lamps, and the lamps are linked to the hold lamps of the main game symbol.

  Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display related to the auxiliary game symbols. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display portion H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps corresponds to the number of auxiliary game symbol changes held (the number of auxiliary game symbol changes not being executed). In the present embodiment, there are two entrance holes, the auxiliary game start entrance H10 and the right general prize entrance P20, as entrances from which an auxiliary game random number can be acquired. Even when the player enters the ball, the display related to the acquired auxiliary game random number is displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display device H20.

  Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as a flow path of the game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. In addition, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in an area other than the game area D30 and / or the game area D30, and plays a role of effect by blinking or the like.

  Next, the movable body accessory YK is installed in the vicinity of the effect display device SG, and plays a role of driving and exciting the game when performing the effect accompanying the symbol variation. It is preferable that the driving is conspicuous by moving in the vertical direction, rotationally driven, or lit, and that the driving is easily performed by the symbol variation with high expectation of big hit.

  Next, the sub input button SB is an operation member that is electrically connected to the sub control board S and that performs an effect based on the operation when operated (pressed). As the operation mode of the sub input button SB, a single press (an operation mode in which the sub input button SB is pressed only once for a short time), a continuous hit (an operation mode in which the sub input button SB is pressed multiple times), and a long press (An operation mode in which the sub input button SB is continuously pressed for a predetermined period). Furthermore, the operation member that is electrically connected to the sub-control board S and that produces an effect based on the operation by pressing (pressing) is not limited to the sub input button SB. The four-way key SB-2 has four operation units, left and right, and can be selected by selecting the effect to be executed (notice effect, etc.) by operating the operation unit. It is configured to have a lever SB-3 on which an effect (such as a movable object actuating) is executed.

  Next, the out mouth D36 is a ball entrance provided below the game area D30, and the game ball that has flowed down without entering any of the game entrances provided in the game area D30 enters. When a game ball enters the outlet D36, a lottery based on random numbers and prize balls based on the random number are not executed, and the game ball is discharged out of the gaming machine. Become. In this embodiment, only the bottom part of the game board is provided with an out mouth D36 into which a game ball that has not won a prize is entered. It is also possible. In that case, in order to clarify that the entrance is not a winning opening, it is desirable not to be confused with the winning opening, for example, by displaying “OUT” using a seal.

  Next, the power saving mode display lamp (for example, constituted by LEDs) D70 is configured to be lit based on whether or not the power saving mode (details will be described later) is on.

  Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko gaming machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine, and in particular controls overall game operations such as lottery when entering the first main game starting port A10 (second main game starting port B10) (ie, game Main control board M that performs control directly related to the profits of the player, and effect control means (sub-main control unit) that performs display control and the like related to various effects on the effect display device SG that adds interest to the game content SM, a sub-sub control unit SS that mainly performs effect display, and a game ball supplied from the prize ball tank KT in accordance with the prize winning to the prize ball tank KT, the prize ball rail KR, and each prize opening, A prize ball payout device (set base) KE including a payout unit KE10 and the like, a prize ball payout control board KH for controlling a payout operation by the payout unit KE10, and a game ball (reserved ball) in the upper ball tray D20 To region D30 A launching device D42 that launches each ball, a launch control board D40 that controls the launching operation of the launching device D42, a power supply unit E that supplies power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine, and a switch that turns on / off the pachinko gaming machine The power switch Ea and the like are provided on the back surface of the front frame D14 (on the opposite side to the game side).

  Next, FIG. 3 is an operation diagram of the sub input button SB and the lever SB-3 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 1, the sub input button SB and the lever SB-3 are arranged on the front surface of the gaming machine, and the sub input button SB and the lever SB-3 are integrated so as to form one member. Configured. First, the operation mode of the sub input button SB will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 5A, the lever SB-3 is housed inside a member that forms the upper ball tray D20 (referred to as a housed state). Note that the lever SB-3 is in the retracted state during most of the game, such as when the main game symbol is stopped. In addition, the lever SB-3 is configured not to detect an operation even if it is operated in the stored state (the effect based on the operation is not executed). On the other hand, the sub input button SB can be operated when the lever SB-3 is in the retracted state, and the operation can be detected by pressing the sub input button SB. Button effective period in the execution variation of the button single press effect described later (the operation of the sub input button SB in the pattern variation for executing the button single press effect, the button repeated press effect, the button long press effect, or the hidden button effect described later) When the sub input button SB is operated during the period in which the effect is received = the period in which the effect is executed by operating the sub input button SB), the effect based on the operation is executed. Note that the period during which the operation of the lever SB-3 is accepted by the symbol variation for executing the lever effect described later is referred to as a lever effective period.

  Next, the operation mode of the lever SB-3 will be described in detail. FIG. 10C is in the same state as FIG. In this state, the lever SB-3 cannot be operated, or the effect is not executed even if operated. Next, as shown in FIG. 4D, when the lever effective period (period in which the operation of the lever SB-3 is effective) in the symbol variation in which the lever effect is executed (the timing one second before the lever effective period). The lever SB-3 is driven so as to protrude from the member that forms the upper ball dish D20 (this state is referred to as a protruding state), and as shown in FIG. By being in the protruding state, it is possible to perform an operation of pulling toward the front as viewed from the player. By pulling the lever SB-3 during the lever effective period in the lever effect, the input of the lever SB-3 is detected, and the effect based on the operation of the lever SB-3 is executed. In addition, the big hit expectation degree of the symbol fluctuation when the lever effect is executed during the symbol fluctuation is higher than the big hit expectation degree of the symbol fluctuation when the single button effect is executed during the symbol fluctuation. It is desirable to configure as follows. In addition, it is preferable that the lever effect be more flashy for the player than the button single effect. In addition, as operation modes of the lever SB-3 during the lever effective period, single pulling (operation mode in which the lever SB-3 is pulled only once in a short time) and continuous pulling (operation mode in which the lever SB-3 is pulled multiple times) , And long pulling (an operation mode in which the lever SB-3 is continuously pulled for a predetermined period). In addition, in the lever single pulling effect that is a lever effect that performs single pulling, the lever continuous pulling effect that is a lever effect that performs continuous pulling, and the lever long pulling effect that is a lever effect that performs long pulling, You may comprise so that the big hit expectation degree of a fluctuation | variation may differ.

  Next, an electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as described above, pays out a game ball based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH to be controlled, various effects on the effect display device SG, such as variation / stop of decorative symbols, sound from the speaker D24, A sub-control board S (in this example, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub-control unit SS are arranged on one board) for controlling execution of the lighting of the game effect lamp D26, error notification, etc., and these A power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including the control board is mainly configured. Here, the sub-control board S is a sub-main control unit SM that controls various effects on the effect display device SG such as variation / stop of decorative symbols, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. And two control units of a sub-sub control unit SS that performs display processing such as a decorative symbol change display / stop display and a hold display or a notice display on the effect display device SG. The main control board M, the winning ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control unit SM, and the sub-sub control unit SS are a CPU that performs various arithmetic processes, and a ROM that stores programs that prescribe the arithmetic processes of the CPU and CPU RAM that temporarily stores data (various data generated during the game, computer programs read from the ROM, etc.) is installed. Hereinafter, a schematic configuration of each substrate and an electrical connection mode between each substrate / device will be outlined.

  First, the main control board M has a winning opening sensor Ns {the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s, the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s, the auxiliary game start entrance entrance detection device H11s, 1st prize winning opening prize detection device C11s, 2nd big prize winning prize winning detection apparatus C21s, general winning detection apparatus (not shown, the general winning entry is a winning entry with a winning ball but no symbol lottery. }, A drive solenoid (not shown) (the above-mentioned first big prize opening electric combination solenoid C13, second big prize opening electric combination solenoid C23, etc.), information display LED (not shown), etc. It is electrically connected to an input / output device that is indispensable to control the progress of the game based on input signals from each input device. Further, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub-main control unit SM / sub-sub control unit SS). For example, information (commands) related to performance / game progress can be transmitted to the sub-control board S. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like via an external connection terminal (not shown), and the main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC via an external connection terminal. The game-related information can be output from an external device to an external device.

  In the present embodiment, as indicated by the arrows in FIG. 4, the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH are configured to enable bidirectional communication, while the main control board M and the sub main The control unit SM is configured to allow one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (the communication method may be either serial communication or parallel communication). The communication between control boards (between control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

  Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout apparatus KE that executes payout of game balls, and an apparatus that can be operated by a player, accepts a game ball rental request, and receives the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to a game ball lending device R for transmission. Although not shown, in the present embodiment, the control circuit unit of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board, and the prize ball payout control board and the launching device (launching handle, firing motor, ball feeding device). Etc.). In the present embodiment, the game ball lending device R is used as a separate body and is adjacent to the game machine. However, the game ball lending device R may be integrated with the game machine. Control and management control of a recording medium for lending such as electronic money may be integrated.

  Next, as described above, the sub-control board S includes an effect display device SG for displaying decorative symbols and the like, a speaker D24, a game effect lamp D26, a drive device for effects such as a movable body accessory YK, and power saving. A mode display lamp D70, a volume switch V10 that can be operated to change the volume output from the speaker D24 and that can be operated only by an administrator, and a button effect (button single-shot effect, button repeated effect, button length) It is configured to change the execution mode of the effect by operating in the push effect, the hidden button effect), and the game machine can be operated by operating on the customization executing screen, the volume adjustment screen, the light amount adjustment screen, etc. A sub-input button SB, a cross key SB-2, a lever SB-3, which are configured so that the setting can be changed (details will be described later) It is connected (in this embodiment, the operation member is provided three). The sub input button SB and the cross key SB-2 are configured to be turned on when pressed, and the lever SB-3 is configured to be turned on by pulling the lever toward the front as viewed from the player. As described above, the sub input button SB and the lever SB-3 are integrated into one mechanism. In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are provided in the sub-control board S, and control of the sound output from the speaker D24 by the sub-main control unit SM and game effects ( Lighting) The lighting control of the lamp D26 and the determination control of the display contents to be displayed on the effect display device are performed, and the display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. It is configured. In the present embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S. However, the present invention is not limited to this (configured as a separate board). However, it is possible to reduce the situation that space is merited and noise is mixed into the wiring or the like by being configured to be integrated). Also, the work sharing between the two control units can be changed as appropriate, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable when a voice control circuit integrated with the VDP is adopted). Further, an electronic value may be given without giving a physical prize ball as a prize ball.

  Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the main control board M is a game peripheral device related to the game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first and second main game shared peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H), A sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) related to the performance is connected to a prize ball payout control board KH that performs payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls based on a payout instruction from the main control board M so that information can be transmitted. ing. Further, the sub main control unit SM (sub game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub sub control unit SS (effect display means SS) for executing image effects, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), speakers D24, and the like. It is connected. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to a prize ball payout device KE including a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, sub main control part SM (sub game control means SM), sub sub control part SS (effect display means SS), prize ball payout control board KH, etc. store data and programs in hardware. ROM, RAM, and elements such as a CPU used for arithmetic processing. In the following description, each unit included in the main control board M may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means that is included in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be configured to be mounted on the main control board M. The details of each means (device) will be described below.

  The “random number” in the claims and the present specification is, for example, “0” to “65535” or “0” to “0” assigned according to the type of random number (for example, a winning random number or a variation mode determining random number). The value is randomly selected from a predetermined range such as “255”. The random number may not be a mathematically generated random number, but may be a pseudo random number generated by a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. For example, the expression method of each value in the random number is a method in which the value is expressed in order along the random number sequence (plus one method), the next value when the final value of the random number sequence is expressed (initial value) ) With a contingent value (initial value update method), a combination of these, and the like.

  Here, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes first and second main game symbol variation management timers MP11t-C (decrement counters) that can be cleared to zero. Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment further includes an auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a second main game start port electric accessory release timer MP22t-B that measures the drive (release) time of the electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10. doing. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a winning ball counter MP33c that measures the winning balls to the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20. The special game time management means MP34 further includes a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a short-time counter MP52c capable of counting the short-time number. Here, the “specific game” is, for example, a probability variation game (probability variation game state) in which a lottery probability for a special game is higher than that in a normal game, or a variation time of a main game symbol is relative to that in a normal game. The time when the release time extension function is activated is relatively short compared to the normal game, and the opening time of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is relatively long.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the time reduction game, the variation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is relatively shortened (time reduction) compared to during the non-time reduction game. function). Furthermore, the winning probability of the auxiliary game symbol becomes a probability variation gaming state (auxiliary game probability changing function). Furthermore, the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is also relatively shortened (auxiliary game time shortening function), and the open extension time of the electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10 is relatively extended (open time). Extension function). In addition, the time shortening game in the present embodiment ends when the total value of the number of changes in the first main game symbol and the number of changes in the second main game symbol exceeds a predetermined number. That is, the number of time reductions is configured to be subtracted every time the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol fluctuate (stop). Note that the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment may have a function of performing a lottery transition from a specific game (for example, a probability-change game or a time-reduced game) to a normal game with a predetermined probability every time a symbol changes. Good (so-called pachinko machines with a falling lottery function).

  Next, game peripheral devices will be described. Since some of the peripheral devices have already been described in detail, the remaining configuration will be briefly described. First, the game peripheral devices are a first main game peripheral device A that is a peripheral device on the first main game side, a second main game peripheral device B that is a peripheral device on the second main game side, and a first main game side. First and second main game shared peripheral device C, which is a shared peripheral device on the second main game side, auxiliary game peripheral device H related to auxiliary games, sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, sub sub control unit SS (and effect display device SG) and the like. Here, the effects controlled by the sub-main control unit SM include the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol and the variation of the decorative symbol in a form synchronized in time with the result of the game. It concerns only the display of information that has no effect. Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

  First, the first main game peripheral device A includes a first main game start opening A10 that triggers the transition to a special game, and a first main game symbol display device A20 that can display stop and change display of the first main game symbol. ,have.

  Next, the second main game peripheral device B has a second main game start port B10 that triggers the transition to the special game, and a second main game symbol display device B20 that can display stop and change display of the second main game symbol. And have.

  Next, the first and second main game shared peripheral device C is in a closed state during a normal game, and is opened under a predetermined condition during a special game (big hit). And a second grand prize opening C20.

  Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H includes an auxiliary game start port H10 that triggers the opening of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10, and a stop display and a change display of the auxiliary game symbols. And an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 capable of supporting the above.

  Here, the drawing variation time management timer SM21t is configured to measure the variation time of the decorative symbol.

  The effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to an effect display device SG that displays an image related to the effect based on information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

  Here, the display area SG10 has a decoration symbol display area SG11 for variably displaying a decoration symbol, and a first hold display section SG12 (and a second hold display section SG13) for displaying main game hold information. ing.

  The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be able to transmit information, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit) ) SS is connected to the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM so as to be able to transmit information. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is sub-game control. Meaning that it is controlled by means (sub-main control unit) SM. Note that another peripheral device may be controlled via the main control board M and another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication).

  Next, FIG. 5 is a channel configuration image diagram. First, when a sound reproduction command (for example, a sound number, a channel number to be used) is transmitted from the sub main control unit SM or the sub sub control unit SS to the sound control unit SO, the sound control unit SO reproduces the transmitted sound reproduction. Load sound data from sound source ROM to control register based on command (for example, based on sound number) {For example, load sound data stored in sound source file (for example, WAV file) corresponding to sound number) }. Here, as shown in the “sound source ROM data image”, the sound source ROM stores various information corresponding to the sound number {for example, the number of channels to be occupied by the sound data (the number of simultaneously used channels) Then, after all the sound data has been reproduced, designation of whether or not to return to the beginning and reproduction (presence / absence of a loop)}, and sound data reproduction processing can be executed based on these various pieces of information. The sound data playback process converts the loaded digital signal sound data (see “digital signal image” in the figure) into an analog signal (see “analog signal image” in the figure) via the DAC. Then, it is realized by outputting to the left speaker SOsL and / or the right speaker SOsR. The lower part of the figure is an image diagram of the channels and the control registers. Since a total of 24 channels are connected from the control register to the left speaker SOsL and the right speaker SOsR, a total of 24 channels are connected. If the number is 1), a maximum of 24 types of sound data can be reproduced simultaneously, and if the stereo output (the number of simultaneously used channels = 2), a maximum of 12 types of sound data can be reproduced simultaneously. In this example, the channel distribution corresponds to the reproduction of sound related to 0 to 11 channels = BGM from the sub-main control unit SM (hereinafter also referred to as music), warning sound effects, etc., 12 ˜23 channels = corresponding to the reproduction of sound related to error notification from the sub-main control unit SM, etc., and the reproduction of sound (sound corresponding to animation moving images, etc.) from the sub-sub control unit SS. ing.

  Next, FIG. 6 is a main flowchart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. After powering on the gaming machine, the process of FIG. That is, after the game machine is turned on and initialized (not shown), in step 1002, the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button and the reset button (RAM clear) of the power supply unit E. Button) has been operated, that is, whether or not an operation of clearing the contents of the RAM has been performed intentionally by a game hall manager or the like. If YES in step 1002, in step 1004, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears all the RAM contents on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits RAM clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub main control unit SM side (transmits at this timing). Alternatively, a command may be set at this timing and transmitted by a control command transmission process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1015. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1002, in step 1007, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not information indicating that the power supply has been normally cut is stored in the RAM. In the case of Yes in step 1007, in step 1008, the CPUMC of the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M (for example, stored in the checksum and RAM area recorded at the time of power interruption). Comparison with the amount of information). Next, in step 1010, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are not normal based on the check result (whether or not the information at the time of power failure is not backed up in the RAM). To do. If YES in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to step 1004 (RAM clear process described above). On the other hand, if step 1007 is No, that is, if the information indicating that the power was normally cut off is stored in RAM, or if step 1010 is No, that is, if the data backed up in RAM is normal, in step 1012, The CPUMC of the main control board M acquires various information commands at the time of power interruption stored (backed up) in the RAM of the main control board M, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side. (It may be transmitted at this timing, or a command may be set at this timing and transmitted by a control command transmission process described later), and in step 1014-1, the main control is performed. The CPUMC of the board M sets the return setting of the solenoid {the second main game start port B10 of the second main game start port B10. , The open or closed state of the grand prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) and the movable piece (for example, a member that allows or inhibits entry into a specific area described later) is turned off. In order to return to the previous state, it is determined whether or not the solenoid operating bit is turned on in the order of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d, the big winning opening, and the movable piece. In order to determine that the second main game start opening / big prize opening / movable piece is open and to open it again), store the solenoid operation flag at the corresponding address} and proceed to step 1015. In step 1015, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores information indicating that the power is normally turned on in the RAM, and proceeds to the processing in step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the CPUMC of the main control board M triggers a scheduled interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt about every 1.5 ms) related to the main process on the main control board M side shown in FIG. 7B. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is set to T) (as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, FIG. 7B is executed), the processing of step 1018 is performed. Migrate and perform various random number update processes. After step 1018, the CPUMC of the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processing (for example, random number counter increment processing) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

  Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the flow of timer interrupt processing performed by the main control board M. The CPUMC of the main control board M executes the process shown in FIG. 5B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, triggered by the arrival of the scheduled interrupt period T (for example, a hardware interrupt about every 1.5 ms), in step 1000-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes input processing described later. Next, in step 1000-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes various random number update processes described later. Next, in step 1000-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an initial value update type random number update process which will be described later. Next, in step 1000-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an initial value random number update process described later. Next, in step 1000-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a timer subtraction process described later. Next, in step 1000-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a starting port 2 effective period setting process (a process for setting an effective period of the second main game starting port B10) described later. Next, in step 1000-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a prize monitoring process described later. Next, in step 3000, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a prize ball payout command transmission control process to be described later. In addition, when the game ball is won at each winning opening, the number of winning ball payouts is 4 balls for the first main game starting port A10, 1 ball for the second main gaming starting port B10, the first big winning port C10 and the second winning ball. The big winning opening C20 has 15 balls, the left general winning opening (also referred to as a general winning opening) P10 has three balls, and the right general winning opening P20 has two balls. The number of prize balls paid out is an example, and the number of prize balls paid out when entering the first main game start opening A10 and when entering the second main game start opening B10 are the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out may be different between the case where the player enters the first grand prize opening C10 and the case where the player enters the second big prize port C20. In addition, when a game ball enters the left general winning opening P10, a lottery such as a success / failure lottery is not executed, and a predetermined number of winning ball payouts (three balls in this example) is given to the player. It is configured. Further, when a game ball enters the right general winning opening P20, a random number on the auxiliary game side is acquired, and a predetermined number of payout balls (2 balls in this example) is given to the player. It is configured. However, the number of winning balls in all winning holes provided in the pachinko gaming machine according to this example does not exceed 15 for one winning (entering) and is constant (abnormal) regardless of the gaming state. It is configured so that the winning ball is not paid out except for winning, while realizing various gaming states. The results of direct games are summarized as “whether or not the launched game ball wins a predetermined winning opening”.

  In this example, since the specific prize ball payout control process is performed not on the main control board M but on the prize ball payout control board KH, the main control board M manages the progress of the payout control in real time. When there is a failure due to a sudden problem such as a power failure while paying out a single game ball for winning, there may be cases where the exact number of prize balls cannot be made. For this reason, in this example, a retry function at the time of anomaly that pays out the game ball for the prize again (for example, when the game ball wins the first main game start opening A10 and one game ball is paid out) And then the remaining three game balls are paid out after the power is restored. Of course, by providing a backup function to the prize ball payout control board KH, it is possible to realize the exact number of prize balls even when such an abnormality occurs. It is not necessary to provide a function.

  Next, in step 2000, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a ball entry detection process described later. Next, in step 1100, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1200, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an electric accessory driving determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a main game content determination random number acquisition process which will be described later. Next, in step 1400, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1600, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a special game control process described later. Next, in step 1601, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a special winning opening effective period setting process described later. Next, in step 1550, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a special game operating condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1550-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an abnormality detection process described later. Next, in step 1550-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a ball entry passage time abnormality detection process which will be described later. Next, in step 1550-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a game state display process described later. Next, in step 1550-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a handle state signal inspection process described later. Next, in step 1550-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an outlet monitoring process described later. Next, in step 1550-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an LED output process described later. Next, in step 1900, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes fraud detection information management processing described later. Next, in step 1950, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an error management process described later. Next, in step 1550-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a firing control signal output process described later. Next, in step 1550-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a test signal output process described later. Next, in step 1550-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a solenoid output process described later. Next, in step 1999, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each process described above to the sub-main control unit side). Next, in step 3500, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an external signal output process described later. Next, in step 1550-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M is set so as to permit the generation of the timer interrupt, and returns to the process executed immediately before the execution of this interrupt process.

  The input process is a process for determining a signal input to the main control board M from an input device such as a sensor and setting a flag or the like corresponding to the signal. In this example, the input process is attached to the game board surface. Switches (for example, a first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s, a second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s, an auxiliary game start entrance entrance detection device H11s, a first grand prize entrance prize detection device C11s, 2nd grand prize opening winning detection device C21s, general winning detection device, etc.), out ball count switch for detecting a ball entering the out port D36, disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, opening signal (for example, front frame D14, door D18) ), Magnetic detection signal 1 (for example, detection signal by magnetic detection sensor 1), radio wave detection signal, impact detection signal, touch state signal, and magnetic detection signal 2 (for example, by magnetic detection sensor 2) A process of monitoring the input of the detection signal). In this example, for special inputs such as a RAM clear switch, input determination or the like is performed by a process different from the input process.

  The random number update process is a process for relatively simply updating (for example, adding a constant) a random number used for a lottery that has a very low influence on the appearance. In this example, a normal symbol variation pattern random number This is a process of updating the auxiliary game symbol variation mode random number (for example, the variation mode random number).

  The initial value update type random number update process is a process for updating a random number used for a lottery that has a certain influence on the appearance (a process different from the various random number update processes described above). , Random number per normal symbol (for example, auxiliary game symbol winning random number), normal symbol random number (for example, auxiliary game symbol stopping random number), special symbol random number (for example, symbol lottery random number), soft random number per special symbol described later, etc. Is a process for updating.

  The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the random number for determining the initial value of the random number that is updated in the initial value update type random number update process used for the lottery in which the influence on the appearance of the ball is constant. As an example of the random number to be updated in this example, an initial value random number per ordinary symbol, an ordinary symbol initial value random number, a special symbol initial value random number, a soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the like can be exemplified. The initial value random number per normal symbol and the normal symbol initial value random number are random numbers that are updated in the initial value random number update process when configured to have a plurality of auxiliary game content determination random numbers.

  In addition, the timer subtraction process is a 2-byte timer (for example, the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C, the second main game start opening electric player release timer MP22t-B, and the special game timer MP34t. , Opening time timer, etc.).

  The start port 2 effective period setting process is a winning port that makes it easy to win a prize by operating the normal electric combination depending on the operating state of the normal electric combination (for example, the second main game start port electric combination B11d). This is a process of setting an effective period of (for example, the second main game start opening B10).

  The winning monitoring process is a process of updating a switch passage counter, creating a security output request to be output to an external terminal board, and sending a command to be transmitted to the effect control board.

  The special winning opening effective period setting process is a process of storing the result of determining the effective period of the special winning openings (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20). Note that, when configured to have the specific area C22 in the big prize opening as in the third embodiment to be described later, the validity period determination result of the specific area C22 is stored by the big prize opening validity period setting process. May be.

  The abnormality detection process is a process for monitoring magnetism, disconnection / short circuit monitoring / power supply monitoring, radio wave monitoring, glass frame set / game board D35 open / closed state monitoring, impact monitoring, and the like. .

  In addition, the ball passing time abnormality detection processing is to detect each ball passing time abnormality when a game ball enters the various ball entrances (for example, the first main game start port A10). This is a process of monitoring the continuous on-time (continuous on-time of the incoming ball sensor).

  In addition, the game state display process is the number of times that the special electric accessory is continuously operated (the number of execution rounds in the jackpot), the error state, the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol display device (displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display device H20). Current auxiliary game holding ball number) and the number of operation holding balls of the special symbol display device (current main game holding ball number displayed on the first main game symbol display device A20 or the second main game symbol display device B20). This is a process for making a display request.

  The handle state signal inspection process is a process for monitoring the touch state of the firing handle (for example, the firing handle D44).

  The out port monitoring process is a process of monitoring an out port (for example, the out port D36) in order to create a security output request.

  The LED output process is a display on a special symbol display device (for example, display of a first main game symbol on the first main game symbol display device A20, display of a second main game symbol on the second main game symbol display device B20). , Display of the number of reserved balls on the first main game side in the first main game symbol display device A20, display of the number of reserved balls on the second main game side in the second main game symbol display device B20), normal symbol display device Display (display of auxiliary symbols on auxiliary game symbol display device H20, display of number of balls on the auxiliary game side on which an operation game is suspended), display of error state, display of game state, display of distinction (for example, display) , The situation to be right-handed, the situation to be left-handed) Performed for initialization of the display is sequentially performs processing control of the LED output to be controlled by the main control board M of the output of the display data.

  The firing control signal output process is a process for outputting a signal for prohibiting or permitting the launch of a game ball, and details thereof will be described later.

  The test signal output process is a process for creating a signal to be output to a test apparatus outside the gaming machine and outputting the signal to a corresponding output port.

  Further, the solenoid output processing means that the normal electric combination (for example, the second main game start opening electric combination B11d) solenoid and the big prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) solenoid. This is a process for outputting output data. As shown in a third embodiment to be described later, a special area C22 is provided in the big prize opening, and the shielding members (upper shielding member C24 and lower shielding member C25) that make it difficult or easy to enter the specific area C22 are provided. If configured, output of output data of the movable piece solenoid is executed by solenoid output processing.

  Next, FIG. 8 is a main flowchart showing the flow of NMI interrupt processing (when power is interrupted) performed by the main control board M. First, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the CPUMC of the main control board M is configured such that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the processing of FIG. Is executed. That is, when the gaming machine is powered off (in this example, when an NMI interrupt occurs), in step 1019-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a timer interrupt is in progress. In the case of Yes in step 1019-1, in step 1019-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not information indicating that the power is normally turned on is not stored in the RAM. On the other hand, if the result of step 1019-1 is No, the process of step 1019-1 is performed again. In the case of Yes in step 1019-2, in step 1019-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores information indicating that the power supply is abnormally disconnected in the RAM, and proceeds to the next step 1022. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1019-2, in step 1019-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores information indicating that the power supply is normal in the RAM, and in step 1020, the CPUMC of the main control board M is stored. The CPUMC sets power interruption information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. Next, in step 1022, the CPU MC of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing. In addition, although the example which performs a power interruption process (FIG. 8) by inputting a power interruption signal into the NMI terminal of the CPU has been described, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a power interruption signal is input to a specific input port. The power interruption process may be performed by determining power interruption by monitoring a specific input port in the main control board side main process (FIG. 6) or timer interruption processing (FIG. 7).

  Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of prize ball payout command transmission control processing according to the subroutine of step 3000 in FIG. First, in step 3100, the main control board M executes a payout control board transmission control process to be described later. Next, at step 3200, the main control board M executes a payout control board reception control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (step 2000).

  Next, FIG. 10 shows a flowchart of the payout control board transmission control process according to the subroutine of step 3100 in FIG. First, in step 3105, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout signal is OFF, that is, whether or not payout is currently being executed. In the case of Yes in step 3105, in step 3110, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is an unpaid prize ball (a prize ball for which a prize ball payout command has not yet been transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH side). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 3110, in step 3115, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes a prize ball payout-related error (for example, an error relating to a payout motor failure, an upper plate full tank), which is an error that is inappropriate to perform a prize ball payout. It is determined whether or not a ball break error or the like has occurred. In the case of Yes in step 3115, in step 3120, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives a prize ball payout command for the number of prize ball payouts corresponding to the unpaid prize ball information in the order in which the current payout process is executed (see FIG. 11). ) Is set. In step 3125, the CPUMC of the main control board M deletes the unpaid prize ball information corresponding to the currently set prize ball payout command, and executes a process of shifting the subsequent information. Next, in step 3130, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits the set prize ball payout command to the prize ball payout control board KH side, and proceeds to the next processing (count payout control board reception control process in step 3200). To do. In addition, also when No is determined in step 3105, step 3110, and step 3115, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3200).

<< Contents of commands and information transmitted / received between main control board / payout control board >>
Here, the contents of commands and information transmitted and received between the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the command from the main control board M to the prize ball payout control board KH according to the present embodiment includes specific information indicating that it is a prize ball payout command and information on the number of prize balls. Specifically, bits 7 to 4 are fixed to 1001 (identification information indicating that the command is a prize ball payout command). Next, bits 3 to 0 relate to the number of prize balls. For example, 0 (0000) means 0 prize balls and 15 (1111) means 15 prize balls. .

  Next, the payout related information transmitted from the prize ball payout control board KH to the main control board M side will be described. Here, as an example, the payout related information (award ball payout related information or payout abnormality related information) is a fixed value (start bit), payout motor operation error information, excessive payout error information, ball path error information, payout motor error information. , Prize ball device error information, pan full error and prize ball payout completion information. The details of each error will be described later. If the bit corresponding to each error is “0”, it means that the error has not occurred. If it is “1”, the error has occurred. Means that has occurred. Bit 0 relates to the completion of prize ball payout, “0” means that the prize ball has been paid out, and “1” means that the prize ball has not been paid out.

  Next, FIG. 12 shows a flowchart of the payout control board reception control process according to the subroutine of Step 3200 of FIG. First, in step 3205, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout related information has been received. In the case of Yes in step 3205, in step 3210, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not error information (out of ball error, upper tray full error, other payout related errors) exists in the received payout related information. Determine. In the case of Yes in step 3210, in step 3215, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the error flag related to the corresponding error, thereby displaying the error information on the winning ball payout control board KH side on the main control board M side. But manage (unified management). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3210, in step 3220, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the error flag related to the error on the prize ball payout control board KH side. In step 3225, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not prize ball payout completion information exists in the received payout related information. In the case of Yes in step 3225, in step 3230, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the set prize ball payout command (the prize ball payout command related to the completion of the current payout) and performs the next process (in step 2000). Process). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 3205 and step 3225, the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2000).

  Next, FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the incoming ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2000 in FIG. First, at step 2100, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an auxiliary game start entrance detection process described later. Next, in step 2200, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a main game start entrance entrance detection process described later. Next, in step 2300, the entry determination means executes a first (second) big prize opening entrance detection process described later. Next, in step 2400, the CPUMC of the main control board M performs a general winning opening entrance detection process described later. Next, in step 2500, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a discharge ball detection process to be described later. Next, in step 2600, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an out-entry ball detection process described later. Next, in step 2700, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a prize ball determination process which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1100).

  Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game start-entry ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the auxiliary game start port detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in Step 2102, in Step 2104, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the auxiliary game start entrance entrance detection device H 11 s is the entrance detection time (the auxiliary game start entrance entrance detection device H 11 s for the time or longer). When an input is detected, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary game starting port H10 is ON for a period of time or more. In the case of Yes in step 2104, in step 2106, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game start flag. Next, in step 2108, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game start port detection continuation flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2200). On the other hand, if No in Step 2102, in Step 2110, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects that the input from the auxiliary game start entrance ball detection device H 11 s is the detection end time (the auxiliary game start port entrance detection device for the time or more). If H11s has not detected an input, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time for which it is considered that the game ball has passed through the auxiliary game start-in entrance detection device H11s. In the case of Yes in step 2110, in step 2112, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game start port detection continuation flag and proceeds to the next process (process in step 2200). Note that if the answer is No in Step 2104 or Step 2110, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in Step 2200).

  Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the main game start-entry ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, in step 2202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game start port detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in Step 2202, in Step 2204, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the first main game start port entrance detection device A11s as the entrance detection time (above that time, the first main game start entrance When the ball detection device A11s detects an input, it is determined whether or not it is ON for at least the time when it is considered that a ball has entered the first main game start port A10. In the case of Yes in step 2204, in step 2206, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first main game start flag. Next, in step 2210, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first main game start port detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2211, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the starting opening ball number counter MJ <b> 12 c and proceeds to step 2216.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2202, in step 2212, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the number-of-entries counter MJ10c for the detection time (the first main game start opening entrance detection device A11s inputs for the time or longer). When the game ball is not detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time that the game ball has passed through the first main game start opening entrance detection device A11s. Next, in step 2214, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first main game start port detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2215, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first main game start port long time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2216. It should be noted that the process moves to step 2216 also in the case of No in steps 2204 and 2212.

  Next, in step 2216, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game start opening confirmation sensor has detected a game ball. In the case of Yes in step 2216, in step 2218, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the first main game start port confirmation counter value (increment), and proceeds to step 2222. Note that if the result is No in step 2216, the process proceeds to step 2222.

  Next, in step 2222, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second main game start port detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2222, in step 2224, the second main game start entrance entrance judging means MJ11-B receives the input from the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s as the entrance detection time (above that time, When the second main game start port entrance detection device B11s detects an input, it is determined whether or not the second main game start port B10s is ON for a time period when it is considered that the second main game start port B10 has entered the ball. In the case of Yes in step 2224, in step 2225, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the flag during the second main game start port effective period is on. In the case of Yes in step 2225, in step 2226, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the second main game start flag. Next, in step 2228, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the number-of-entry counter value. Next, in step 2230, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the second main game start port detection continuation flag, and proceeds to step 2240.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2225 (when the entry of the game ball is detected during the period when the entry to the second main game start opening B10 is not valid), in step 2231, the CPUMC of the main control board M It is determined that there has been an illegal entry at the two main game start opening B10, a second main game start opening illegal entry command (command to the sub-control board S side) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2240. Note that if the result is No in Step 2224, the process proceeds to Step 2240.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2222, in step 2232, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the second main game start port entrance detection device B <b> 11 s is detected time (the second main game start port is input for the time or more). When the ball detection device B11s has not detected an input, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time that it is considered that the game ball has passed through the second main game start entrance ball detection device B11s. In the case of Yes in step 2232, in step 2234, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the second main game start port detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2238, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the second main game start port long time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2240. Note that if the result is No in Step 2232, the process proceeds to Step 2240.

  Next, in step 2240, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects that the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s (the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s) has detected a fraud detection time (normal entry). It is determined whether or not it is ON for a time exceeding the set time and a time for determining that fraud has been performed. In the case of Yes in step 2240, in step 2242, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) main game start port long-time detection flag, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 2300). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2240, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300).

  Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the first (second) big winning opening entrance detection processing according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, in step 2302, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first (second) big prize opening detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the first grand prize winning prize detection device C11s (second big prize winning prize detection device C21s) as the ball detection time (this time). As described above, when the entry detection device detects an input, it is determined whether or not the entry is longer than the time (time when it is considered that there is an entry at the entrance). In the case of Yes in step 2304, in step 2305, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the flag during the first (second) big prize opening valid period is on. In the case of Yes in step 2305, in step 2306, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) big winning opening entrance flag. Next, in step 2308, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the number-of-entry counter value. Next, in step 2310, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) big prize opening detection continuation flag, and proceeds to step 2320.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2305 (when a game ball is detected during a period in which it is not valid to enter the big prize opening), in step 2311, the CPUMC of the main control board M is illegal in the big prize opening. It is determined that there has been a successful entry, the first (second) big prize opening illegal entry command (command to the sub-control board S side) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2320. Note that if the answer is No in Step 2304, the process proceeds to Step 2320.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 2302, in Step 2312, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects the input from the first grand prize winning prize detection device C11s (second big prize winning prize winning detection device C21s) as the detection time {the time concerned. As described above, when the first grand prize opening prize detection device C11s (second big prize opening prize detection device C21s) has not detected an input, the game ball has received the first big prize opening prize detection device C11s (second grand prize opening prize). It is determined whether or not it is OFF for more than the time taken to complete the passage through the detection device C21s). In the case of Yes in step 2312, in step 2314, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first (second) big prize opening detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2318, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first (second) special winning opening long time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2320. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2312, the process proceeds to step 2320.

  Next, in step 2320, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the first grand prize winning prize detection device C11s (second big prize winning prize winning detection device C21s) is the fraud detection time {first time or more When the winning opening winning detection device C11s (second large winning opening winning detection device C21s) detects an input, it is time to consider that an illegal entry to the first large winning opening C10 (second large winning opening C20) has been detected. } Whether or not it is ON is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2320, in step 2322, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) special winning opening long time detection flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2320, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2400).

  Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the general winning opening entrance ball detection processing according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. The general winning opening P10 (the left general winning opening P10 and the right general winning opening P20 may be collectively referred to as the general winning opening P10) may be paid out when a game ball enters. A general winning entrance entrance detection device P11s (in this embodiment) that is a entrance that does not affect the progress of the game (does not execute a lottery that affects the progress of the game) and that detects the entrance of the game ball. Are the general prize opening entrance detection device P11s which is a sensor for detecting the entrance of the game ball to the left general prize opening P10 and the general prize opening which is a sensor for detecting the entrance of the game ball to the right general prize opening P20. And two general winning opening entrance detection devices P11s with the entrance detection device P11s).

  First, in step 2402, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the general winning opening detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects that the input from the general winning entrance entrance detection device is the entrance detection time (the general winning entrance entrance detection device detects the input for the time or longer). Then, it is determined whether or not it is ON for a time equal to or longer than a time when it is considered that there is a ball in the general winning opening. In the case of Yes in step 2404, in step 2406, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the general winning opening entrance flag. Next, in step 2408, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the number-of-entry counter value. Next, in step 2410, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the general winning opening detection continuation flag, and proceeds to step 2420. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2402, in step 2412, in step 2412, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the general winning entrance entrance detecting device (the input time from the general winning entrance entrance detecting device is equal to or longer than this time). If the game ball is not detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time that it is considered that the game ball has passed the general winning opening entrance ball detection device. In the case of Yes in step 2412, in step 2414, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2418, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening long time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2420. It should be noted that the process proceeds to step 2420 even when the determination in step 2404 and step 2412 is No.

  Next, in step 2420, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the general winning entry entrance detection device is an illegal detection time {if the general winning entrance entrance detection device detects an input for the time or longer, the general winning entry is detected. It is determined whether or not the time is equal to or longer than the time when it is considered that an illegal entry into the mouth has been detected. In the case of Yes in step 2420, in step 2422, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the general winning opening long time detection flag, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2500). Even in the case of No in step 2420, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2500).

  Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the discharged ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, in step 2502, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the total discharge confirmation when the input from the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s detects the entry detection time (the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s detects the input for the time or more It is determined whether or not the sensor C90s is ON for a time that is considered as having entered the ball. In the case of Yes in step 2504, in step 2506, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2508, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90, and proceeds to step 2520.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2502, in step 2510, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects that the input from the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is the detection end time (the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s has not detected the input for the time or longer). In this case, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time for which it is considered that the game ball has passed the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s. In the case of Yes in step 2510, in step 2512, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2514, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the discharge confirmation long-time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2520. Note that if the answer is No in step 2504 or step 2510, the process proceeds to step 2520.

  Next, in step 2520, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the input from the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is ON for the fraud detection time or longer. In the case of Yes in step 2520, in step 2522, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the discharge confirmation long-time detection flag, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2600). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2520, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2600).

  Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of out-entry ball detection processing according to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. First, in step 2602, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the out port detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects that the input from the out-entry ball detection device C80s is the ingress detection time (the out-entry ball detection device C80s detects the input for the time or longer). Then, it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time (the time it is considered that there is a ball entering the out port C80). In the case of Yes in step 2604, in step 2606, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the out port detection continuation flag, and in step 2608, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the entrance number counter value ( Increment), and the process proceeds to step 2620.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2602, in step 2610, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives an input from the out-entry ball detection device C 80 s for the detection end time (the out-entry ball detection device C 80 s receives an input for the time or more If not detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time (the time it is considered that the game ball has passed through the out-mouth entrance detection device C80s). In the case of Yes in step 2610, in step 2612, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the out port detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2615, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the out-port long time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2620. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2604 or step 2610, the process proceeds to step 2620.

  Next, in step 2620, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the out-entry ball detection device C80s is the fraud detection time (when the out-entry ball detection device C80s detects the input for the time or longer). In addition, it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time for which it is considered that an illegal entry to the outlet C80 is performed. In the case of Yes in step 2620, in step 2622, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the out-port long time detection flag, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2700). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2620, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2700).

  Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the winning ball number determination process according to the subroutine of step 2700 in FIG. First, in step 2702, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game start flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds the number of prize balls paid out (4 in this example) to the first main game starting port A10 to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc. to add. Next, in step 2708, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores information (for example, information related to the number of prize balls paid out) for paying out the prize balls related to the first main game start opening A10. Migrate to On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2702, the process proceeds to step 2712.

  Next, in step 2712, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second main game start flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2712, in step 2714, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds the number of prize balls paid out (1 in this example) to the second main game starting port B10 to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc. to add. Next, in step 2718, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores information indicating that a prize ball related to the second main game start opening B10 is to be paid out (for example, information relating to the number of prize ball payouts). Migrate to On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2712, the process proceeds to step 2722.

  Next, in step 2722, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first (second) big winning opening entrance flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2722, in step 2723, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first (second) big winning opening entrance flag. Next, in step 2724, the CPUMC of the main control board M counts the number of prize balls to be paid out for the first big prize opening C10 (second big prize opening C20) (15 in this example) as the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc. ) Is added. Next, in step 2728, the CPUMC of the main control board M pays out a prize ball related to the first big prize opening C10 (second big prize opening C20) (for example, information related to the number of prize balls paid out). Is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to Step 2732. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2722, the process proceeds to step 2732.

  Next, in step 2732, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the general winning opening entrance flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2732, in step 2733, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the general winning entry entrance flag. Next, in step 2734, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds the number of prize balls to be paid out for the general winning opening to the counter value of the winning ball counter MHc (in this example, the left general winning opening: 3, the right general winning opening) : Add 2). Next, in step 2738, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores information (for example, information related to the number of prize balls paid out) for paying out the prize balls related to the general winning opening, and performs the next processing (step 1100). The process proceeds to (1). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2732, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1100).

  Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has entered the auxiliary game start port H <b> 10 (inflow, in the case of a gate). In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1103, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits an auxiliary game start entrance command to the sub-main control unit SM, which is a command related to entering the auxiliary game start entrance H10. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1110. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1102, in step 1104, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the player has entered the right general winning opening P20. If Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1106, in step 1108, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a right general winning opening entry command, which is a command related to having entered the right general winning opening P20, to the sub main control unit SM. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1110. Note that if the answer is No in step 1106, the process proceeds to step 1110. Next, in step 1110, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the number of reserved balls is not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1110, in step 1112, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1114, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the hold ball in the form of being set in the RAM area of the main control board M together with the information on what number is the hold, and the next processing ( The process proceeds to step 1200). In the case of No in step 1104 and step 1110, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1200). Here, in this embodiment, it is comprised so that the random number by the side of an auxiliary | assistant game can be acquired, when it enters into the auxiliary | assistant game start opening H10 or the right general winning opening P20. Further, since the auxiliary game start port H10 has a gate shape, the game ball that has entered the auxiliary game start port H10 (passed through the auxiliary game start port H10) will continue to flow down the game board surface and start the auxiliary game. While it is possible to enter the entrance downstream (right general prize opening P20, etc.) downstream of the entrance H10, the game balls entered into the right general prize entrance P20 flow down to the back of the game board surface, and thereafter It is configured not to enter the entrance. Although details will be described later, even if a game ball enters the auxiliary game start port H10 (the game ball passes through the auxiliary game start port H10), no prize ball is paid out, but the right general winning port P20. When a game ball enters, a prize ball is paid out.

  Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the electric-powered object releasing flag is off. In the case of Yes in Step 1202, in Step 1204, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a holding ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the auxiliary game side game state (the flag state of the auxiliary game short time flag) and also uses the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H. The stop symbol is determined based on the acquired gaming state of the auxiliary game side and the auxiliary game symbol winning random number based on the reserved ball (for example, when the auxiliary game short time flag is on, The winning symbol is selected with high probability) and temporarily stored in the RAM area of the CPUMC of the main control board M.

  Here, the right side of the figure is an example of a lottery table for determining an auxiliary game stop symbol. As shown in the table, in this example, there are “D0, D1, D2” as the stop symbols, and “D1, D2” as the stop symbols as the winning symbols. In the non-time-reduced game, when the stopped symbol is “D1”, the open mode is (0.2 seconds open → closed), and the open mode of the electric combination that will be opened is stopped. When the symbol is “D2”, the release mode is (open for 0.2 seconds → close for 0.8 seconds → open for 2.0 seconds, closed) (longest open). In the time-saving game, when the stopped symbol is “D1”, the release mode is (1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → closed). When the symbol is “D2”, the opening mode is configured to be (open for 0.2 seconds → close for 0.8 seconds → open for 4.0 seconds → close). Note that the stop symbol is likely to be a lost symbol “D0” during a non-time-reduced game, and the stop symbol is likely to be a winning symbol “D1” during a time-reduced game.

  Next, in step 1218, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the auxiliary game symbol variation time to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H based on the game state on the auxiliary game side (flag state of the auxiliary game short time flag). A predetermined time (for example, 1 second when the auxiliary game short time flag is on and 10 seconds when the auxiliary game short time flag is off) is set. In step 1220, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag. Next, in step 1222, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the holding information recorded in the RAM area of the CPUMC of the main control board M after subtracting 1 from the holding ball related to the auxiliary game symbol, After the game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-H is started, the auxiliary game symbol variation display is started on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g.

  Next, in step 1224, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H and determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol and confirms and displays the acquired stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol on the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g. To do. In step 1228, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag. Next, in step 1230, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is “winning” (D1 · D2 in this example). In the case of Yes in Step 1230, in Step 1232, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens based on the winning symbol on the auxiliary game side (for example, in the case of the winning symbol “D1”, it is opened for 1 second → closed for 1 second) -> Open for 1 second-> Close for 1 second-> Open for 1 second-> Open in a closed state. In case of winning symbol "D2", open for 0.2 seconds, closed for 0.8 seconds, open for 5 seconds) And a predetermined time related to the opening time (opening / closing time) of the electric winning thing is set in the second main game start opening electric accessory releasing timer MP22t-B. Next, in step 1234, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the electric agent releasing flag. Then, in step 1236, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second main game start port electrical accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10, and proceeds to step 1242. Note that if the result of Step 1202 is No, the process proceeds to Step 1242. In the present embodiment, when the main game short flag is off and the auxiliary game stop symbol is the predetermined hit symbol (D2), the time for which the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is kept open is the longest. Has been.

  Next, in step 1242, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the second main game start port electric accessory release timer MP22t-B and determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the electric accessory release time has been reached. Determine. In the case of Yes in step 1242, in steps 1244 and 1246, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d and turns off the electric accessory releasing flag, and performs the next processing. The process proceeds to (Step 1300).

  If No in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224. If No in steps 1206, 1224, 1230, and 1242, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1300).

  Further, in this flowchart, for the sake of convenience, after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, the process proceeds to the next step immediately, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to move to the next processing after a fixed stop display time of about 500 ms (for example, this processing is performed by performing branch processing using a stop display fixing flag and a timer). Achievable). In addition, there may be a plurality of auxiliary game content determination random numbers, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number for determining whether or not an auxiliary game is successful, an auxiliary game symbol stop random number for determining an auxiliary game symbol stop symbol, and an auxiliary game symbol. An auxiliary game symbol variation mode random number or the like for determining the variation time may be provided.

  Although not shown, in the second opening operation of the second main game starting port B10 in the one opening operation of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d (opening operation based on the stop of the symbol per auxiliary game). Even when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) have entered, the opening operation of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is completed, that is, the time-saving game state (auxiliary game short flag on) ), When the opening (longest release) of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d based on the auxiliary game stop symbol “D2” is executed, “open for 0.2 seconds → close for 0.8 seconds → The opening time of “4 seconds open → closed” ends, or the predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls is in the second main game start port B10 during the open period of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d. If you enter the ball, whichever comes first, Opening of the second main game start hole electric won game B11d (opening period) is configured to terminate. In addition, in the non-time-reduced gaming state (auxiliary gaming time short flag off), when the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d based on the auxiliary game stop symbol “D2” is released (longest release), "Open for 0.2 seconds-> Close for 0.8 seconds-> Open for 2.0 seconds-> Close" ends, or during the opening period of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d, the predetermined number (for example, The opening (opening period) of the second main game start port electric component B11d is completed by the achievement of whichever comes first when the 10th game ball enters the second main game start port B10. ing. In addition, the total amount of time that the ordinary electric accessory is open at the time of the longest release (when the auxiliary game stop symbol is “D2”) in the time-saving game state (auxiliary game short flag on) is 4.2 seconds. The total amount of time that the ordinary electric accessory is open at the time of the longest release (when the auxiliary game stop symbol is “D2”) in the time reduction game state (auxiliary game short flag off) is 2.2 seconds. Even in the state, it is configured not to exceed 6 seconds through one maximum opening time, and for each gaming state (time-saving gaming state) so that the maximum number of winnings in operation does not exceed approximately ten. Or whether it is a non-time-saving gaming state).

  Further, in this example, when the normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) that triggers the operation of the ordinary electric accessory (second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) is confirmed and displayed in a winning manner, (for example, The game machine is configured to operate within 500 ms, which is shorter than the shortest symbol variation time in the gaming machine, so that it can be clearly associated with which trigger the normal electric accessory is operating. In order to prevent a large number of game balls from winning a prize during the closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory (second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) (in the middle of the operation from opening to closing), The drive source (solenoid) is selected so that the object (second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) returns to the non-operating state in a short time, and the game ball wins more than necessary, It is designed not to differ greatly from the design.

  Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game start port entrance information has been received from the first main game start port entrance detection device A11s of the first main game start port A10. judge. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1303, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends the first main game start opening command to the sub main control unit SM, which is a command related to entering the first main game start opening A10. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999, and the process proceeds to step 1304. Next, in step 1304, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls relating to the main game (especially the first main game side) is within the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the first main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, a winning lottery random number for determining success / failure, a symbol lottery random number for determining a winning symbol, and a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol are determined. The three random numbers of the variation mode lottery random numbers to acquire are acquired. Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated from random number generation means having different update periods and random number ranges, and are sequentially acquired at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number in the RAM area of the main control board M. Next, in step 1310, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information indicating that the first main game random number has been acquired (pending occurrence command) to the sub-main control unit SM. Set (sent to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999).

  Note that the success / failure lottery random number may be constituted by one random number or may be a random number generated by two or more random numbers. As a random number generated by two or more random numbers, a CPU built-in random number updated based on a CPU clock or an external clock and a soft random number per special symbol (main game symbol) updated by timer interrupt processing are provided. The result obtained by computing (for example, adding) may be used.

  Next, in step 1312, whether or not the CPUMC of the main control board M has received the second main game start port entrance information from the second main game start port entrance detection device B11s of the second main game start port B10. Determine. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls related to the main game (especially the second main game side) is within the upper limit (for example, 4). In the case of Yes in step 1314, in step 1316, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the second main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers of the success / failure lottery random number, the symbol lottery random number, and the variation mode lottery random number are acquired in the same manner as the first main game side. Incidentally, the acquisition range of each random number on the first main game side and the acquisition range of each random number on the second main game side (for example, the acquisition range of the random determination random number for the first main game and the acquisition lot random number for the second main game) Are set to the same. Next, in step 1318, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number in the RAM area. Next, in step 1320, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information indicating that the second main game random number has been acquired (pending occurrence command) to the sub-main control unit SM. Set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and proceed to the next process (process in step 1400). In the case of No in Step 1302 and Step 1304, the process proceeds to Step 1312. In the case of No in Step 1312 and Step 1314, the process proceeds to the next process (Process of Step 1400).

  Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the RAM area of the main control board M and confirms whether there is no hold of the second main game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a first main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1401, in step 1400 (2), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a second main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600).

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when there is a holding ball of the second main game symbol, regardless of the presence of the holding ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the holding of the first main game symbol) However, this is not limited to this, but it is not limited to this (the pending digest based on the winning order and both main game symbols are simultaneously executed in parallel). It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery for lottery.

  Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. In addition, since this process is substantially the same process on the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Use parentheses. First, in step 1403, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the change start condition is satisfied. Here, the change start condition is that the special game is not being played (or the condition device is being operated), the main game symbol is not changing, and there is a hold of the main game symbol. Although not shown in this example, in the case of providing a variable fixed time (time for displaying the fixed display symbol after the main game symbol is displayed), during the variable fixed time, You may comprise so that it may not satisfy | fill.

  In the case of Yes in step 1403, the CPUMC of the main control board M is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M in step 1405 and step 1406. The second main game content determination random number) is read out, deleted from the RAM area of the main control board M, and the remaining stored information temporarily stored is shifted (holding digestion process). Next, in step 1410-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the main game table 1 corresponding to each gaming state, and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (in particular, The main game symbol winning lottery is executed based on the winning lottery random number).

  Here, FIG. 26 (main game table 1) is an example of a first main game success / failure lottery table (second main game success / failure lottery table). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability varying gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-stochastic varying gaming state. Note that the winning probability is merely an example, and is not limited to this.

  Next, in step 1410-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the first main game symbol determination lottery table (second main game symbol determination lottery table), determines the main game symbol determination result lottery and the first Based on a main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, a symbol lottery random number), stop symbols relating to the main game symbol are determined, and these are temporarily stored in the RAM area.

  Here, FIG. 26 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game symbol determination lottery table (second main game symbol determination lottery table). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, when a big hit is won, a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, “4A, 5A, 7A” and “4B, 5B, 7B”) are selected. One main game symbol is determined as a jackpot symbol. Note that the number of special game rounds determined with reference to the main game symbol is 4 rounds for 4A, 4B, 5A, and 5B, and 10 rounds for 7A and 7B. Note that the types of random numbers and stop symbols are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. May}

  Next, in step 1412, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the first main game variation mode determination lottery table (second main game variation mode determination lottery table) corresponding to each game state, and the main game symbol. Based on the result of the lottery determination and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the variation mode lottery random number), the variation mode of the main game symbol is determined, and these are stored in the RAM area of the main control board M. Is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 1414.

  Here, the main game table 3 shown in FIG. 26 is an example of a first main game variation mode determination lottery table (second main game variation mode determination lottery table). As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the main game symbol variation mode (variation time) for a certain random value can be determined based on the main game symbol winning / losing lottery result and the main game short flag state. Has been. For example, for a certain random number value, when the main game symbol winning / losing lottery result is win, it is easy to determine a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long, and the main game short time flag is on (time reduction) In the case of a gaming state), it is configured such that a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively short is easily determined. This example is merely an example, and is not limited to the type of variation mode (variation time), the selection rate, or the like. Further, the symbol variation time on the first main game side in the time-reduced game state (when the main game short-time flag is on) may be configured to be relatively long {the symbol variation on the second main game side Is configured to be advantageous for the player, it is easy for the second main game side to be suspended by reducing the symbol variation efficiency on the first main game side (advantageous for the player). It is particularly effective when the starting port on the first main game side and the starting port on the second main game side cannot be distinguished in order to establish the situation.

  Next, in step 1414, the CPUMC of the main control board M performs commands (stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information, variation mode information, etc.) related to the main game symbols temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, and A command related to the current gaming state (design variation display start instruction command) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM side (by the control command transmission process of step 1999, the sub main control unit SM side). To be sent). Next, in step 1415, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined time related to the main game symbol variation time in the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C. Next, in step 1416, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On B21g), according to the variation mode stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, the variation display of the main game symbol is started. Next, in step 1417, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the changing flag, and proceeds to step 1420.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1403, in step 1419, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the changing flag is on. If Yes in step 1419, the process proceeds to step 1420. If No in step 1419, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600).

  Next, in step 1420, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1420, in step 1422, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a command for transmitting information (symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the sub-main control unit SM side to the effect that the symbol variation ends. It is set in the buffer MT10 (sent to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1423, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). B21g) The main game symbol variation display is stopped, and the stop symbol stored in the RAM area of the main control board M is displayed and controlled as a fixed stop symbol. Next, in step 1424, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the changing flag.

  Next, in step 1430, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the RAM area of the main control board M and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a big hit symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1430, in step 1440, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation flag, and proceeds to step 1500. On the other hand, if No in step 1430, the process proceeds to step 1500.

  Next, in step 1500, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a specific game end determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600). Even in the case of No in step 1420, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, in step 1506, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game probability change flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1506, in step 1510, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 1510, in step 1512, the CPUMC of the main control board M decrements (decrements) the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1514, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1514, in step 1516, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game short time flag. Next, in step 1518, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game short time flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600). Note that the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600) also in the case of No in step 1506, step 1510, or step 1514. In this way, in this example, the remaining short time count (the remaining number of symbol fluctuations in which the time-reduced gaming state is terminated by the number of symbol variation end times after the end of the special game) is transmitted to the sub-control board S. Has been.

  Next, FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game transition permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in steps 1604 and 1606, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game transition permission flag and turns on the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1607, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an initial value (1 in this example) to a round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1608, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets information to start a special game (special game start display instruction command) in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side. (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1612.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1602, in step 1610, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. If YES in step 1610, the process proceeds to step 1612. In the case of No in step 1610, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the special game permission has not been granted, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1601).

  Next, in step 1612, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, whether or not it is immediately before the start of each round. In the case of Yes in step 1612, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, in step 1614, a set opening pattern (for example, an opening pattern that keeps opening, a pattern that performs opening and closing a plurality of times) is set. Next, in step 1616, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1618, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1620, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the first large winning opening electric combination C11d (or the second large winning opening electric combination C21d) of the first large winning opening C10 to be the first large. The winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C20) is opened, and a special game timer MP34t (especially an opening time timer) is set to a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), and the process proceeds to Step 1622. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1612, that is, when the big prize opening is being opened, the process proceeds to step 1622 without performing the processing of steps 1614 to 1620.

  Next, in step 1622, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a game state command (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning game balls, etc.) related to the current special game to the sub-main control unit SM side. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1624, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and a predetermined number (for example, the second big winning port C20) in the round (for example, It is determined whether or not there are 10 winning balls. If Yes in step 1624, the process proceeds to step 1628. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1624, in step 1626, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the special game timer MP34t (particularly, the opening time timer) for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) related to the opening of the big prize opening. ) Has passed. Also in the case of Yes in step 1626, the process proceeds to step 1628. In the case of No in step 1626, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1601).

  Next, in step 1628, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the first big prize opening electric combination C11d of the first big prize opening C10 (or the second big prize opening electric combination C21d of the second big prize opening C20). Is stopped and the first big prize opening C10 (or the second big prize opening C20) is closed. Next, in step 1630, the CPUMC of the main control board M resets the special game timer MP34t (especially the open time timer). Next, in step 1632, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1633, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1634, it is determined whether or not the last round has ended (for example, whether or not the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) exceeds the maximum number of rounds). If Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1638, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores information indicating that the special game is to be ended (special game end display instruction command) in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM side. Set (sent to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process of step 1999). In step 1650, a game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1601). Even in the case of No in step 1634, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1601).

  In this example, the maximum number of game balls set as a program in one unit game (execution of one round) is set as 10 and when the maximum number of winnings is reached. Controls to close immediately the winning prizes (for example, the first winning prize C10 and the second winning prize C20), and prevents the game balls exceeding the maximum winning number from winning, Even if the maximum number of winnings is exceeded due to unforeseen circumstances, such as the game ball temporarily stops between the door and the game board during the closing operation of the winning opening, the prescribed conditions (within the prescribed period after closing) As long as the number of winnings exceeds the maximum number of winnings, the winning is processed as an effective winning.

  More specifically, when the first grand prize opening C10 is opened in the first round of the big hit, when the predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) is won in the first big prize opening C10 in the first round, Although one round will end, in the situation where nine game balls have entered the first grand prize opening C10 in the first round, Even when the number of game balls exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) that will end the first round due to the simultaneous occurrence of the ball entering the first round enters the first grand prize opening C10, The winning ball is paid out with the winning being valid. On the other hand, the drive mechanism (solenoid and drive transmission mechanism) and the opening / closing part (doors, etc.) of the grand prize opening perform the closing process and the big prize opening in real time so as to prevent excessive prizes (winning exceeding the maximum number of prizes). Are closed, and a structural design and an electrical design are made so that a plurality of game balls do not stay in the opening / closing member or in the vicinity thereof immediately before the closing operation. Thereby, it is comprised so that it may not become disadvantageous to a player, suppressing that it will become the game performance which deviated from the appearance design value.

  In addition, the maximum opening time set as a program in one unit game (execution of one round) is set to be 30 seconds or less through one unit game, and is large before the maximum opening time elapses. When the number of winning game balls in the winning opening reaches the maximum number of winnings, the large winning opening is controlled to be closed immediately. (Even after the maximum opening time has elapsed due to unforeseen circumstances such as the game ball temporarily stopping between the door and the game board during the closing operation of the grand prize opening) Only within a predetermined period), the winning is processed as an effective winning.

  More specifically, according to the type of jackpot and the number of unit games (the number of execution rounds), as a mode of opening the big prize opening when executing one round of jackpot, “15 seconds open → 2 seconds closed → One of a plurality of operation patterns, such as “14.5 seconds open → close” and “29.5 seconds open → close”, is set. The total open time is 30 seconds or less, and the maximum opening time (29.5 seconds) of the grand prize opening has passed in one round, and the game ball is being closed during the closing process of the big prize opening. Even if a player has entered a ball, the winning ball is paid out with the winning as valid within a valid period (about 1000 ms after the closing process of the big winning opening is completed). On the other hand, the prize winning drive mechanism (solenoid and drive transmission mechanism) and the opening / closing part (door, etc.) close the execution of the closing process and real-time winning prize closing so as to prevent winning after the maximum opening time has elapsed. In addition, a structural design and an electrical design are made so that a plurality of game balls do not stay in or near the opening / closing member immediately before the closing operation. Thereby, it is comprised so that it may not become disadvantageous to a player, suppressing that it will become the game performance which deviated from the appearance design value.

  Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. First, in step 1652, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a probabilistic jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that will shift to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game. 5A, 7A, 5B, 7B "). In the case of Yes in step 1652, in step 1654, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change flag, and proceeds to step 1656. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1652 (in this example, the non-probability big hit symbol which is a big hit symbol that will shift to the non-probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game is a stop symbol. In this example, “4A In the case of “4B”), the process proceeds to step 1656. Next, in step 1656, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the number of times reduced according to the gaming state and the stop symbol in the time reduction number counter MP52c. Next, in step 1658, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game short time flag. Next, in step 1660, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game short time flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1601).

  Also, in this example, only when the jackpot ends, the electric support game state (the time for opening the prize opening relating to the ordinary electric accessory, the time until opening, the number of times of opening, etc. and the ordinary electric accessory is activated) This is a state in which the probability that the combination of symbols to be displayed is changed so as to facilitate winnings, and may be referred to as a time-saving gaming state or an auxiliary gaming time-saving gaming state) The state changes in the main game symbol for a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times, 6 times) determined by the game state and the stop symbol, except during the probability variation of the special symbol (when the probability variation game state). (Until the change of the main game symbol of the predetermined time is completed). In addition, the electric game support game so that the number of game balls acquired in combination with winnings in other winning holes is substantially the same as the number of game balls that have been fired (the play rate does not exceed 1) or less. The game is designed in a state of play (placement of each prize opening, the operation details of the ordinary electric game, the probability of hitting the auxiliary game symbol, etc.), and the game performance in the electric support game state is the performance of the game. It is supposed to be no higher than. With this configuration, the game related to the main game symbol and the game related to the auxiliary game symbol become a game master-slave relationship, and the game is not complicated more than necessary.

  Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special game operation condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. First, in step 1552, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the specific game flag (main game probability change flag / main game short flag / auxiliary game short flag). Next, in step 1558, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1560, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the special game transition permission flag. Next, in step 1562, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the condition device operation flag, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1550-1). In the case of No in step 1552, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1550-1).

  Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of fraud detection information management processing according to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. First, in step 1902, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the illegal radio wave sensor and determines whether or not the input from the illegal radio wave sensor is continuously ON a predetermined number of times (for example, the process is a timer interrupt process). The purpose of this process is to eliminate the influence of noise by determining whether or not a predetermined number of interrupts are continuously ON. In the following, the process in FIG. The case of “continuous for a predetermined number of times” has the same purpose). If YES in step 1902, in step 1904, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that an illegal radio wave has been detected, turns on the illegal radio wave detection flag, and proceeds to step 1912. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1902, in step 1906, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the illegal radio wave sensor and determines whether or not the input from the illegal radio wave sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1906, in step 1908, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the detection of illegal radio waves has been completed, turns off the illegal radio wave detection flag, and proceeds to step 1912. Note that if the result of Step 1906 is No, the process proceeds to Step 1912.

  Next, in step 1912, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the illegal magnetic sensor and determines whether or not the input from the illegal magnetic sensor is continuously ON a predetermined number of times. If YES in step 1912, in step 1914, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that illegal magnetism has been detected, turns on the illegal magnetism detection flag, and proceeds to step 1922. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1912, in step 1916, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the illegal magnetic sensor and determines whether or not the input from the illegal magnetic sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1916, in step 1918, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the detection of illegal magnetism is completed, turns off the illegal magnetism detection flag, and proceeds to step 1922. Note that if the answer is No in Step 1916, the process proceeds to Step 1922.

  Next, in step 1922, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the door opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the door opening sensor is ON continuously for a predetermined number of times. If Yes in step 1922, in step 1924, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the door unit D18 has been opened, turns on the door opening flag, and proceeds to step 1932. On the other hand, if No in step 1922, in step 1926, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the door opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the door opening sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1926, in step 1928, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the door unit D18 has been opened, turns off the door open flag, and proceeds to step 1932. Note that if the answer is No in step 1926, the process proceeds to step 1932.

  Next, in step 1932, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the frame opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the frame opening sensor is continuously ON for a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1932, in step 1934, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the gaming machine frame D has been opened, turns on the frame open flag, and proceeds to step 1950. On the other hand, if No in step 1932, in step 1936, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the frame opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the frame opening sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1936, in step 1938, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the gaming machine frame D has been opened, turns off the frame open flag, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1950). . Even in the case of No in step 1936, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1950).

  Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of error management processing according to the subroutine of step 1950 in FIG. First, in step 1952, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not an error occurrence condition is satisfied. In the case of Yes in step 1952, in step 1954, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a command (command to the sub control board S side) indicating that an error has occurred and error type information (control command in step 1990). It is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side by transmission processing). Next, in step 1956, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the error cancellation condition is satisfied. In the case of Yes in step 1956, in step 1958, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a command (command to the sub control board S side) relating to the information that the error has been released (control command transmission processing in step 1990). Is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1550-7). Note that the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1550-7) also in the case of No in step 1952 or step 1956.

  Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of a firing control signal output process according to the subroutine of step 1550-7 in FIG. First, in step 1550-7-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M indicates a payout control board (sometimes referred to as a prize ball payout control board KH), a communication state (BIT0), and a disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality (BIT1). Get the error flag. BIT0 indicating the communication state indicates normal if “00000000B”, and indicates abnormal if “00000001B”. In BIT1 indicating a disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality, "00000000B" indicates normality, and "00000010B" indicates abnormality. Next, in step 1550-7-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M calculates the logical product of the error flag acquired in step 1550-7-1 and the determination data (“00000011B”). Next, in step 1550-7-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the firing permission signal bit data. For example, BIT5 of the output port indicates a launch permission signal. If “00000000B”, an error (abnormal) is indicated, and if “00100000B”, normal. Next, in step 1550-7-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M outputs to the output port and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1550-8). Here, the output port is, for example, BIT0 is digit 1 bit data, BIT1 is digit 2 bit data, BIT2 is digit 3 bit data, BIT3 is digit 4 bit data, BIT4 is digit 5 bit data, BIT5 is firing permission signal bit data , BIT6 is configured as production strobe bit data, and BIT7 is configured as a security bit.

  Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of external signal output processing according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. First, in step 3502, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the gaming state temporary storage means MB and confirms the state of the gaming machine. Next, in step 3504, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the external terminal transmission content determination table 1 and sends it to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal board G based on the confirmed state of the gaming machine. A signal indicating the state of the gaming machine is output, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1550-11).

(External relay terminal board)
Here, the signal output through the external relay terminal board G according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the lower part of the same figure (image diagram of signal output). The external relay terminal plate G has a plurality of external connection terminals as output terminal portions to which various cable connectors are connected {for example, information relating to award ball payout, information relating to winning or symbol stop, current gaming state (normal gaming state, Error information for outputting various error information detected by the opening detection sensor when the door is opened, the terminal for gaming state information output for outputting information on specific gaming state, special gaming state, etc.) Output terminals and the like} are provided. As will be described later, the plurality of output terminals are configured to be capable of outputting information from the plurality of output terminals to the hall computer HC by being connected to the hall computer HC by a cable harness. Here, in the present embodiment, one output terminal is assigned as an output terminal for payout related information, which is information output from the winning ball payout control board KH and is a plurality of types of information. The output terminals other than the one output terminal are output terminals for signals output from the main control board M. For example, a jackpot output terminal that outputs a signal during a big hit at the time of a big hit (a plurality of jacks depending on the type of the big hit) ), A door opening output terminal that outputs a signal while the glass door is open, a start opening winning output terminal that outputs a signal when winning at the starting opening, and the ball ball tank KT has insufficient balls Output of game-related information that is important information for game hall operators, such as a terminal for output when the ball is out of time, a terminal for output of special symbols that outputs a signal at the time of stoppage of special symbols, etc. Terminal. That is, the output terminal for the payout related information is set as one output terminal, so that it is possible to avoid the exhaustion of the output terminals for these important game related information.

  In the present embodiment, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to transmit game-related information and payout-related information to the external relay terminal board G in the form of one-way serial transmission. Yes. That is, no transmission line is provided from the external relay terminal board G to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH (the same applies to information transmission from the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC).

  Here, the outline of the information transmission method of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. First, between the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH and the external relay terminal board G, and the external relay terminal board. G and Hall computer HC are connected by a cable harness. On the other hand, as shown in this example, since the external relay terminal board G is constituted by a communication relay (so-called relay), the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH and the hall computer HC are always in conduction. I don't mean. That is, an electrical signal (a binary logic signal whose voltage is Hi level / Low level) input from the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G is the relay. After being replaced by a physical signal (a binary logic signal whose switch state is ON / OFF) by the unit, the signal is output from the output terminal of the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC. More specifically, the external relay terminal plate G has a plurality of relay coils G1 and contact portions G2 corresponding to the respective input / output terminals. When the relay coil G1 is excited based on the pulse signal input to the input terminal, a magnetic force is generated, and the contact portion G2 is closed by the generated magnetic force, whereby the output terminal and the hall computer HC are brought into conduction. In addition, when the relay coil G1 is demagnetized, the output terminal and the hall computer HC are not electrically connected by returning the contact portion G2 to the open state. Therefore, on the hall computer HC side, a pulse signal substantially the same as the pulse signal input to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G can be obtained by detecting the conduction period. With this configuration, one-way communication from the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH to the hall computer HC can be physically secured, and the main control board M and This prevents a goto action (so-called remote operation goto) that illegally operates the prize ball payout control board KH. In this example, the mechanism using the relay coil is configured to enable one-way communication to the hall computer HC while preventing the go-to action, but is not limited to this, for example, a pair of light emitting units and A photo sensor having a light receiving unit is also configured to enable one-way communication (for example, light from a light emitting unit connected to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH is received by a hall computer HC). It is supplemented that the signal can be received by reading with the unit.

  However, since the structure is once replaced with a physical signal (switch state is ON / OFF), the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH are connected to the hall computer HC with one of the external relay terminal boards G It is difficult to transmit complex information using an input / output terminal, and one type of information is transmitted using the one input / output terminal (for example, an output terminal for the number of special symbol determination times, It is customary to configure such that “only information indicating that one variation of a special symbol has ended” can be transmitted).

  Next, control processing executed on the sub-main control unit SM side will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 35 is a main flowchart on the sub control board S side (particularly on the sub main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 9A is a process on the sub-main control unit SM side that is executed after resetting when the gaming machine is powered on. That is, at the time of powering on the gaming machine, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub-main control unit SM executes initial processing based on information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clearing). When the information is received → the sub-side RAM is initialized, when various information commands are received → the production-related information at the time of power interruption is reset in the sub-side RAM). Next, in step 2004, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the volume level and the light amount level to default values and turns off the automatic button flag. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the volume level, the light amount level, and the automatic button operation setting (when the automatic button setting is turned on, the same effect as when the operation member is not operated is operated. Executed) is configured so that the player can set (change), and when the power is turned “off → on”, it is related to the previous setting (setting changed by the player and setting changed by the administrator). It is configured to be set to the default value. The default values according to this example are “volume switch large → 5, medium → 1, small → 4”, light level “medium”, and automatic button operation setting “off” (default). Setting a value may be referred to as a default setting). Next, in step 2050, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a management operation control process, which will be described later. The dB when the volume is set to the default setting is “95” when the volume switch is large, “85” when the volume switch is in the middle, and “82” when the volume switch is small. Even when the default setting is used, the relationship of “volume switch large dB> volume switch dB> volume switch small dB” is maintained. In the present embodiment, when the power is turned “off → on”, the volume level, the light amount level, and the automatic button operation setting are set to the default settings. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Depending on switching off, the volume level, light level, and automatic button operation settings remain the same as before the power was turned off, and the RAM level is cleared to set the volume level, light level, and automatic button operation settings to the default settings. You may comprise. Thereafter, the process proceeds to a loop process for repeatedly executing (b) which is a repetitive process routine of the sub-main control unit SM. Here, when (b) is executed, first, in step 2150, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a non-game period control process, which will be described later, as shown in the process of FIG. Next, in step 3600, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a customization control process described later. Next, in step 3700, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a music selection process which will be described later. Next, in step 3800, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a hold information management process described later. Next, in step 3900, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a decoration symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 4000, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a decorative symbol display control process to be described later. Next, in step 2900, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a special game related display control process which will be described later. Next, in step 4400, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a background image display process to be described later. Next, in step 4500, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes an electric lamp operation control process to be described later. Next, in step 3250, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a volume control process described later. Next, in step 2999, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a display command transmission control process (sends commands set in these series of subroutines to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and ends this repetitive process routine. To do.

  As described above, the sub-main control unit SM employs a form in which the sub-main routine (S2150 to S2999) is loop-processed after reset. Further, the process of FIG. 5C is an interrupt process of the sub main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line on the main control board M described above is a terminal of the CPU of the sub main control unit SM (in this example). , NMI terminal) is a processing flow (c). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the sub-main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2005, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sends a command input port (described above) from the main control board M side. Check the data signal line input port). In step 2006, the CPUSC of the sub control board S temporarily stores the command transmitted from the main control board M side in the RAM area on the sub main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result, and immediately before this interrupt processing. Return to the process that was being executed.

  Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the management operation control process according to the subroutine of step 2050 in FIG. First, in step 2052, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the management menu screen display conditions (in this example, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM clear button) are satisfied. Note that the display conditions of the management menu screen are not limited to the conditions in this example, and there is no problem if the management menu screen is changed so that only the administrator can operate. For example, the management menu screen cannot be operated unless the door D18 is opened. A switch may be provided, and power-on while pressing the switch and the RAM clear button may be used as a display condition of the management menu screen, or power-on while pressing the sub input button SB and the RAM clear button. It is good also as display conditions. Further, the management menu screen may be displayed when the sub input button SB is pressed while the door D18 is open. In such a case, the door D18 is closed. When the sub input button SB is pressed, a customization execution screen (a menu screen that can be operated by the player) is displayed. When the door D18 is open, the sub input button SB is pressed to manage. A menu screen (a menu screen that can be operated by the administrator) is displayed. When the sub input button SB is pressed, the sub control board S (sub side) determines which of the menu screen that can be operated by the player and the menu screen that can be operated by the administrator is to be displayed. (1) When the door D18 is opened, a door opening command is transmitted to the sub-side, and the sub-control board S detects an operation of the sub-input button SB when the door opening command is not received. A menu screen that can be operated by the administrator is displayed, and when the operation of the sub input button SB is detected when the door opening command is received, the menu screen that can be operated by the administrator is displayed. (2) The door D18 is opened. When the door open flag is turned on, the sub control board S displays a menu screen that can be operated by the player when detecting the operation of the sub input button SB when the door open flag is off. Shown, the administrator detects an operation of the sub input button SB to display the available operation menu screen when the door opening flag is on, it may be configured to. Note that while the door is open, a sound related to the door open error is always output, and the volume related to the door open error is a constant volume (85 dB in this example) regardless of the state of the volume switch and the volume level. It has become. In the case of Yes in Step 2052, in Step 2054, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the management menu screen (see FIG. 37) on the forefront of the display area SG10. Next, in step 2056, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub input button SB has been operated while “actual machine setting” is selected on the management menu screen. In the case of Yes in step 2056, in step 2058, the CPUSC of the sub control board S deletes the management menu screen and displays the actual device setting screen on the forefront of the display area SG10. In this embodiment, when the sub-input button is operated while “actual machine setting” is selected on the management menu screen, the management menu screen is deleted and the actual machine setting screen is displayed. Not limited to this, if the sub-input button is operated while “actual machine setting” is selected on the management menu screen, the management menu screen is displayed on the rear layer and the actual machine setting screen is displayed on the front layer. In other words, both the management menu screen and the actual device setting screen may be displayed. Next, in step 2060, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the volume adjustment function is on or off based on the operation of the sub input button SB with the cross key SB-2. It should be noted that settings other than on / off of the volume control function (for example, automatic button operation settings) can be changed. However, the setting of the light control function is intended to prevent epilepsy (a type of chronic brain disease). It is preferable that a configuration that cannot be adjusted by the player (off setting) is impossible. Next, in step 2062, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the volume adjustment function is determined to be off. In the case of Yes in step 2062, in step 2064, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the volume adjustment prevention flag (if the flag is on, the player cannot perform volume adjustment), and the next Shifts to processing (loop processing of sub-main side routine). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2062, in other words, if the volume adjustment function is determined to be on, in step 2066, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the volume adjustment prohibition flag and performs the next processing (sub-main side). Routine loop processing).

  If NO in step 2056, in step 2068, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub input button SB has been operated while selecting “power saving mode setting” on the management menu screen. In the case of Yes in step 2068, in step 4100, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a power saving mode switching control process described later, and proceeds to the next process (loop process of the sub main side routine). On the other hand, if No in step 2068, in step 2070, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays a management menu screen based on the operation of the sub input button SB and the cross key SB-2. Next, in step 2072, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the setting of the gaming machine based on the operation of the sub input button SB and the cross key SB-2, and performs the next processing (loop processing of the sub main side routine). Migrate to Even in the case of No in step 2052, the processing shifts to the next processing (loop processing of the sub main side routine). When the volume adjustment prohibition flag is on (when the administrator sets the volume adjustment impossible), the volume level is configured to be fixed at the default setting described above in step 2004. Yes. When the volume adjustment function is turned off by the management menu, that is, when the volume adjustment prohibition flag is turned on, the volume cannot be adjusted unless the volume adjustment function is turned on again in the management menu. It is configured to continue. The configuration relating to the management menu is as follows: (1) When an error occurs, both the volume and the amount of light are specified values based on the error regardless of the setting of the management menu (the maximum volume and the maximum amount of light may be used). ) Measuring meal break time (seating time), over winning sound, custom logo color, menu used at factory inspection, etc. are possible. (3) Whether volume can be adjusted and light intensity can be adjusted (4) Production mode A, production mode B, production mode C, and so on. (4) Production mode A, production mode B, production mode C It may be configured such that an effect tendency can be set, such as enabling selection of an effect mode (if the effect mode is different, the occurrence frequency of a specific specific effect is different). In addition, as a specific example of the configuration relating to the measurement of the meal break time (seating time) described above, (1) When the “break time” mark is selected and the “start” mark is determined with the sub input button, (Measurement) starts, (2) When the time has reached a predetermined time, it can be notified by sound output from the effect display device SG, the game effect lamp D26, the speaker D24, etc. (3) The predetermined time can be set. Yes, it can be set between 10 minutes and 60 minutes. (4) If the power is turned off during the predetermined time measurement, the time measurement may be cleared. Further, the over winning sound means that a game ball is awarded to a big winning opening which is a predetermined number of closing prizes in the above-described step 1624 during the execution of a certain round. This is the sound that is output when the game ball exceeds the number and enters the big prize opening. The over winning sound can be selected from a plurality of types, and silence (no effect) can also be selected. The above-mentioned logo is a mark indicating the name of the company that created the gaming machine, and is displayed on the special game end demonstration time, which is the period after the end of the final round in the jackpot, or on the standby demonstration screen. The logo color and logo shape can be changed by customizing the logo color.

  Next, FIG. 37 is a management menu screen display image diagram according to the present embodiment. First, the image on the left is an image that displays a management menu, and shows an example of displaying items that can be set by the administrator (cannot be set by the player). In this example, it is configured to be able to set the actual machine, reset the date and time, initialize the elapsed days, and set the power saving mode. This management menu screen is displayed by turning on the power while pressing the RAM clear button in the power-off state. On the management menu screen, each setting item can be selected by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2 (in this example, “actual machine setting” is selected), and the sub input button The setting item can be determined by pressing SB. After each setting is completed, the setting can be completed by setting the cursor to “setting end” at the bottom and pressing the sub input button SB. Note that the method for terminating the management menu screen is not limited to this, and the management menu screen may also be configured to be terminated when a change in various settings is determined in “actual machine settings” or the like. In each menu, if the setting item is determined by pressing the sub input button SB, the determined setting is not required even if the sub input button SB is pressed and the display of the management menu screen is not ended by “end setting”. Is configured to be executed and stored. For example, after the volume control function is set to off (cannot be adjusted), it is managed by turning off the power or playing the game ball into the main game start port while the management menu screen is displayed. Even if the menu display is finished, the determined setting is reflected. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that the determined setting is not reflected unless the display of the management menu screen is terminated by pressing the sub input button SB at “end of setting”. In addition, if an error occurs during the management menu display (for example, an illegal winning error that occurs when a predetermined number of game balls have been entered in the big winning opening in a state that is not a big hit), the management menu It may be configured to execute screen display and sound output accompanying the occurrence of an error while maintaining the display. In such a configuration, the screen display accompanying the error occurrence has higher display priority than the management menu screen display, so the screen display accompanying the error occurrence is the front layer rather than the management menu screen display. Is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if an error occurs during the display of the management menu, the management menu may be deleted and a screen associated with the error may be displayed.

  Next, the image on the right side shows an example of a display screen when “actual machine setting” is selected. In this example, the “volume control function” can be set, and each setting item can be selected by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2 (“volume control function” is selected). The function can be switched on / off by operating the left / right button of the cross key SB-2. When “ON” is determined, the volume adjustment prohibition flag is turned off, and when “OFF” is determined, the volume adjustment prohibition flag is turned on. For event 2, event 3, and event 4, items that can be set as appropriate may be provided. For example, “automatic button operation setting” may be switched on / off. In the present embodiment, the “light quantity adjustment” function is always effective in consideration of epilepsy prevention and the like, and cannot be turned on / off. Note that the “light intensity adjustment” function may be configured to be able to be turned on / off, but in such a configuration, the default value of the light intensity is not set to the maximum value. When the function is turned off, the light amount is preferably set to a value other than the maximum value.

  Next, FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the power saving mode switching control process according to the subroutine of step 4100 in FIG. First, in step 4102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S deletes the management menu screen and displays the actual machine setting screen on the forefront of the display area SG <b> 10. Next, in step 4104, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the power saving mode is on or off based on the operation of the sub input button SB and the cross key SB-2. Next, in step 4106, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the power saving mode is determined to be on. In the case of Yes in step 4106, in step 4108, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the power saving mode to ON. Next, in step 4110, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets green (display color when the power saving mode is on) as the display color of the power saving mode display lamp D70, and proceeds to step 4116. If NO in step 4106, in other words, if the power saving mode is determined to be off, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the power saving mode to off in step 4112. Next, in step 4114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets red (display color when the power saving mode is off) as the display color of the power saving mode display lamp D70, and proceeds to step 4116. Next, in step 4116, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the confirmation message (for example, when the power saving mode is turned on, “the power saving operation mode is turned on) based on the power saving mode being turned on / off. Message ") is displayed on the display area SG10 for a predetermined period of time, and the process proceeds to the next process (loop process of the sub-main routine).

  Next, FIG. 39 is a flowchart of non-game period control processing according to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. First, in step 2152, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the operation of the firing handle D44 has been detected. If Yes in step 2152, the process proceeds to step 2158. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2152, in step 2154, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol variation has newly started. If Yes in step 2154, the process proceeds to step 2158. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2154, in step 2156, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a new main game suspension has occurred. If Yes in step 2156, the process proceeds to step 2158. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2156, in step 2157, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 2157, in step 2158, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the non-game period has ended, and measures the non-game period measurement timer HY10t (the period in the non-game state, step 2164, step 3618, the increment timer starting at step 4225 and step 4048) is stopped and reset. In addition, in this example, it is configured to determine that the decorative symbol is in a non-game state when the decorative symbol is stopped and no hold exists (the decorative symbol is stopped after the end of the big hit) In addition, a state in which no hold exists also becomes a non-game state). Next, in step 2160, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S causes the standby demonstration screen, the power saving screen, the first customization guidance screen, the second customization guidance screen, the customization execution screen, the light amount adjustment screen, and the volume adjustment screen (each screen). The display image and the role thereof are deleted). Next, in step 2162, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the display of the power saving screen has been erased. In the case of Yes in step 2162, in step 2164, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts the non-game period measurement timer HY10t (increment timer), and proceeds to the next process (process of step 3600). In the case of No in step 2157, it is determined that the non-gaming state has not ended, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 3600) without executing the processing in steps 2158 to 2164. Also in the case of No in step 2162, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 3600). Thus, in this embodiment, during the big hit, the standby demonstration screen, the power saving screen, the first customization guidance screen, the second customization guidance screen, the customization execution screen, the light amount adjustment screen, and the volume adjustment screen are displayed. In the same figure, it is shown that the processing of step 2158 and step 2164 is continued during execution of the big hit, but this is not restrictive, and step 2156 at the start of the big hit is shown. The processing of step 2160 may be executed, and the non-game period measurement timer HY10t may not be started while the jackpot is being executed.

  Next, FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the customization control process according to the subroutine of step 3600 in FIG. First, in step 3600-1, whether the CPUSC of the sub control board S is not currently in a big hit or is in a short time (time-saving gaming state), in other words, the big hit is not executed and It is determined whether or not the time is short (non-time-saving gaming state). In the case of Yes in step 3600-1, in step 3601, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the power saving screen is currently being displayed. In the case of Yes in step 3601, in step 3602, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the non-game period measurement timer value is the first guidance value (the timer value at which the first customization guidance screen is displayed. Seconds) or more. In the case of Yes in step 3602, in step 3604, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the first customization guide screen on the forefront of the display area SG10. In this example, the player is configured to be able to change the volume level, light level, and automatic button operation settings (sometimes collectively referred to as gaming machine customization) and execute gaming machine customization. The display for informing the transition condition of the screen to be performed is referred to as a customization guidance screen. The customization guidance screen has a two-stage display mode depending on the non-game period. Since the non-game period can be displayed in a short time, the first customization guidance screen is changed to the second customization guidance screen. Note that the mode of notifying the transition condition of the screen for executing the gaming machine customization is not limited to this. (1) Display the first customization guidance screen at the timing when the non-game period measurement timer value becomes 5 seconds. Without turning on the sub input button SB and the cross key SB-2 (lights on the sub input button SB and the cross key SB-2) and the non-game period measurement timer value becomes 75 seconds. The second customization guide screen is displayed at (2) Sub-input at the timing when the non-game period is started (non-game period measurement timer value = 0 and measurement of the non-game period measurement timer HY10t is started) The button SB and the cross key SB-2 may be lit. Next, in step 3650, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a customization guidance screen display control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 4200, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a customization execution display control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 3606. If NO in step 3602, in step 4250, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a customization control process during gaming which will be described later, and proceeds to step 3606. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first customization screen is configured to be displayed 5 seconds after the non-game period starts, and even if the sub input button SB is operated before 5 seconds have elapsed. It is configured so that automatic button operation settings, volume level or light level cannot be changed via the customization screen (automatic button operation settings, volume level or light level can be changed without going through the customization screen. Is). It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and automatic button operation setting, volume level or light level change is performed until 5 seconds after the non-game period starts, regardless of whether or not the customization screen is passed. It may be configured not to be able to. In addition, the customization guidance screen may be displayed during time reduction, and the volume, light intensity, and automatic button operation settings can be customized. If the time is short, the sub input button SB (or the cross key) can be used while the fluctuation is stopped. The configuration may be such that the light amount can be customized only when the operation of SB-2) is performed (the volume and automatic button operation settings can be changed even during the change).

  Next, in step 3606, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the non-game period measurement timer value is equal to or greater than the default setting value (900 seconds in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3606, in step 3608, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the automatic button flag. Next, in step 3610, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the volume switch V10 is “large”. In the case of Yes in step 3610, in step 3612, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the volume level to a default value (“5” in this example), and proceeds to step 3614. If NO in step 3610, the process proceeds to step 3614 without setting the volume level to the default value. Next, in step 3614, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current power saving mode is on. In the case of Yes in step 3614, in step 3616, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays a power saving screen, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 3700). In this way, when the power saving screen is displayed, No is determined in step 3601, and display control processing such as a customization executing screen described later is not executed. In addition, when the display condition of the power saving screen is satisfied when the customization screen etc. is displayed, the displayed customization execution screen etc. will be deleted (display the power saving screen on the front layer). And the customization screen can be displayed on the rear layer). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3614, in step 3618, the CPUSC of the sub control board S resets and starts the non-game period measurement timer HY10t (increment timer), and proceeds to the next process (process of step 3700). . It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 3600-1, step 3601, and step 3606, the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 3700). Here, in the present example, the automatic button operation setting and the volume level can be changed to the default setting when the non-game period reaches the default setting value of 900 seconds or more, and the volume switch V10 is set with respect to the volume level. Only when “L” is “Large”, the default setting according to the elapse of the non-game time can be executed. That is, with regard to the default setting of the volume level, when the power is turned off to on, the volume level becomes the default value in all cases where the volume switch is set to “large / medium / small” (default setting). If the non-game period is 900 seconds, the volume level is the default value only when the volume switch is “Large” and the volume switch is “Medium / Small”. Is configured so that the volume level does not become the default value (the default setting is not executed). Further, when the power saving mode is on, all the customization of the gaming machine is configured so as not to be executed. Although not shown, the power saving mode is turned off (for example, by operating the sub input button SB). In the case of turning off, the gaming machine customization can be executed and the fact that the gaming machine customization can be executed is notified (for example, the first customization guidance at the timing when the power saving mode is turned off). Screen is displayed).

  Next, FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the customization guidance screen display control process according to the subroutine of step 3650 in FIG. First, in step 3652, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the up / down button of the cross key SB-2 has been operated. The cross key SB-2 has four buttons as an operable button: an upper button, a lower button, a right button, and a left button. In the case of Yes in step 3652, in step 3655, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is displaying the customization guide screen (the first customization guide screen and the second customization guide screen are collectively referred to as the customization guide screen). It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 3655, in step 3656, the CPUSC of the sub control board S erases the displayed customization screen, displays the light amount adjustment screen on the forefront of the display area SG10, and proceeds to step 3668. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 3655, the process proceeds to step 3668. If the up / down button of the cross key SB-2 is operated while the standby demonstration screen is displayed, the light amount adjustment screen (screen for executing the light amount adjustment) is not displayed, but the light amount adjustment is possible. (It is the same process as the customization control process during game, which will be described later).

  If NO in step 3652, in step 3658, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub input button SB has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 3658, in step 3660, the CPUSC of the sub control board S erases the displayed customization screen and standby demonstration screen, and displays the customization execution screen (for switching on / off of the automatic button operation setting). Screen) is displayed in the foreground of the display area, and the flow advances to step 3668. The configuration of the standby demonstration screen applicable to this example is as follows: (1) The volume on the standby demonstration screen is relatively low or silent (details will be described later), (2) standby The demonstration display period (the maximum display period among the periods during which the standby demonstration screen can be displayed) is longer than the demonstration start value (240 seconds) (for example, 660 seconds), (3) the standby demonstration screen During the display, even if there is no game ball entering the main game start port, the display of the standby demonstration screen is terminated by the detection of the firing handle D44. (4) Demonstration of non-game period starts in the time-saving game state Even if the value (240 seconds) is reached, the standby demonstration screen is not displayed, and only the volume is the same as when the standby demonstration screen is displayed. (5) A situation where right-handedness should be executed (for example, a time-saving gaming state) And the standby demonstration screen is displayed (or non-game period) When a maximum volume that can be output is relatively small (may be muted), a specific right-handed instruction display is displayed or a sound is output by detection of the firing handle D44 (specific period) Details will be described later.) (6) While the standby demonstration screen is displayed, when the sub input button SB is operated, the customization execution screen is displayed on the front layer, and the symbol fluctuation stop display screen (displays the stop symbol of the normal decoration symbol) Is displayed on the rear layer, and depending on the detection of the launch handle D44, the symbol fluctuation stop display screen is displayed. When the cross key SB-2 is operated, the standby demonstration screen continues to be displayed, but the volume and light intensity are changed. It may be configured as follows. As a specific display example of the standby demonstration screen, it may be configured to display a moving image for executing a game description and a game machine motif introduction (character introduction or advance notice introduction). Note that the display condition of the standby demonstration screen is not limited to the non-game period reaching the demonstration start value (240 seconds in this example). For example, the time during which the operation of the firing handle D44 is not detected The standby demonstration screen is displayed when the predetermined time A (10 seconds) has reached (or the time when the game ball is not being fired), and the maximum display time of the standby demonstration screen is the predetermined time B (100 seconds). May be. In such a configuration, the predetermined time A (10 seconds) is longer than the shortest variation time (for example, 3 seconds) in the gaming machine and shorter than the maximum variation time (for example, 120 seconds). It is. The predetermined time B (10 seconds) is also longer than the shortest variation time (for example, 3 seconds) in the gaming machine and shorter than the maximum variation time (for example, 120 seconds). Further, the time when the operation of the firing handle D44 is not detected (or the time when the game ball is not fired) is longer than the average time from the time when the game ball is fired on the game board surface to the time when it flows into the outlet D36. It is preferable that the predetermined time A (10 seconds) is longer (in order to prevent a standby demonstration screen from being displayed despite the player firing a game ball).

  If NO in step 3658, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 3662 whether or not the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 have been operated. In the case of Yes in step 3662, in step 3664, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the volume adjustment prohibition flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 3664, in step 3665, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the customization guide screen is being displayed. In the case of Yes in step 3665, the displayed customization screen is deleted in step 3666, the volume adjustment screen is displayed on the forefront of the display area SG10, and the process proceeds to step 3668. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 3665, the process proceeds to step 3668. When the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 are operated in the situation where the standby demonstration screen is displayed, the volume adjustment screen (the screen for executing the volume adjustment) is not displayed, but the volume adjustment is possible. (It is the same process as the customization control process during game, which will be described later). In addition, the volume adjustment screen may be hidden while the symbol variation display is displayed, the standby demonstration screen is displayed, or the symbol variation stop display screen is displayed, or the volume adjustment screen is always displayed while the symbol variation stop display screen is displayed. The volume control screen may be configured so that the volume level can be adjusted with the cross key SB-2 and the volume adjustment screen can be changed according to the volume level. It is also possible to configure so that the volume level can be adjusted with the cross key SB-2 and the display of the volume adjustment screen can be changed in accordance with the volume level.

Here, the processing of Steps 3662 to 3666 is summarized as follows:
(1) When the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 are operated while the first customization guide screen is being displayed and the volume adjustment prohibition flag is on. → The volume adjustment screen is not displayed and the volume level is not displayed. Cannot be changed (2) When the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 are operated while the first customization guide screen is displayed and the volume adjustment prohibition flag is off, the volume adjustment screen is displayed, and according to the display The volume level can be changed. (3) When the left / right button of the cross key SB-2 is operated while the standby demonstration screen is displayed and the volume adjustment prohibition flag is off, the volume adjustment screen is not displayed (standby The demo screen remains displayed), and the volume level can be changed.

  Next, in step 3668, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the non-game period measurement timer value is equal to or greater than the demonstration start value (240 seconds). In the case of Yes in step 3668, in step 3670, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays a standby demonstration screen on the forefront of the display area SG10. Next, in step 3672, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the demo screen mode to the sub game state type, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 4200). In this embodiment, the standby demonstration screen is displayed when the non-game period measurement timer value reaches the demonstration start value. However, the display start condition of the standby demonstration screen is limited to this. For example, if the non-game period measurement timer value reaches the demo start value in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the standby demonstration screen is displayed, while the non-game period measurement timer value starts the demonstration in the time-reduced gaming state. When the value is reached, the standby demonstration screen may not be displayed (in the time-saving gaming state, the standby demonstration screen is not displayed regardless of the non-game period measurement timer value). Also, in such a configuration, the volume output when the non-game period measurement timer value becomes the demonstration start value regardless of the gaming state, the volume of the demonstration screen mode is “1” (FIG. 45) or silence, that is, it may be configured to be lower or silent than the current volume setting value (volume determined from the volume switch and volume level). Similarly, it may be configured to be lower than the current light amount setting value (light amount determined from the light amount level) or silent. Further, in the time-saving gaming state, the non-game time measurement timer HY10t itself may not be measured (the timer value is always 0 and not timed).

  If NO in step 3668, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S in step 3668 indicates that the non-game period measurement timer value is the second guidance value (the timer value at which the second customization guidance screen is displayed. In this example, , 75 seconds) or more. In the case of Yes in step 3673, in step 3676, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the second customization guide screen on the forefront of the display area SG10, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 4200). Note that if the answer is No in step 3664 or step 3673, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 4200). While the standby demonstration screen is displayed, the customization guide screen is not displayed, but the sub input button SB and the cross key SB-2 are turned on (at the edge of the sub input button SB and the cross key SB-2). A lamp that can be turned on is provided) (it is also turned on while the customization screen is displayed).

  Next, FIG. 42 is an example of a customization guidance screen image diagram according to the present embodiment. First, the upper left part is the first customization guide screen, the upper right part is the second customization guide screen, the lower left part is the standby demonstration screen, and when 5 seconds have passed in the non-game state after the stop of symbol fluctuation, A first customization guidance screen is displayed. In the first customization screen, it is displayed that the automatic button operation setting can be changed by pressing the sub input button SB, and the volume / light quantity adjustment method is not displayed. Note that the display of the first customization screen is translucent, and even if the display of the first customization guide screen and the decorative symbol are displayed in an overlapping manner, the decorative symbol can be visually recognized. Further, by pressing the sub input button SB while the first customization guide screen is displayed, customization of the actual device (change of automatic button operation setting) becomes possible.

  Next, after the first customization guidance screen is displayed, the second customization guidance screen is displayed when 70 seconds have elapsed in the non-game state (when 75 seconds have elapsed since the non-game period has elapsed). Is displayed. In the second customization guidance screen, in addition to the display mode of the first customization guidance screen, a display mode in which a volume adjustment guidance image and a light amount adjustment guidance image are added to the lower portion of the display area SG10. Note that the first customization guidance screen and the second customization guidance screen are translucent, like the first customization guidance screen.

  Next, after the second customization guide screen is displayed, if 165 seconds have passed in the non-game state (240 seconds have passed since the non-game period), the standby demonstration screen is displayed. Is displayed. In the standby demonstration screen, the display of the first customization guide screen and the second customization guide screen is deleted, and a story display or the like is displayed. Note that the standby demonstration screen is not translucent, and if the display of the standby demonstration screen and the decorative symbol are displayed in an overlapping manner, the decorative symbol is not visible or difficult to see (the decorative symbol display The display area is smaller than the display of the standby demonstration screen, the display of the decorative pattern is displayed on the rear layer than the display of the standby demonstration screen, and the like. In addition, when the on adjustment prohibition flag is on, the second customization guide screen is configured not to display the on adjustment.

Next, FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the display control process during customization according to the subroutine of step 4200 in FIG. First, in step 4202, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the light amount adjustment screen is being displayed. If Yes in step 4202, in step 4204, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the up / down button of the cross key SB-2 has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 4204, in step 4206, the CPUSC of the sub control board S changes the selected light amount level based on the operation of the cross key SB-2 and executes lighting with the confirmation lighting pattern. Then, the process proceeds to step 4220. In this embodiment, when adjusting the light level,
(1) When the light amount level is selected with the cross key SB-2, the lighting is performed with a confirmation lighting pattern corresponding to the selected light amount level. (2) When the light amount level is determined with the sub input button SB, A confirmation notification display for notifying which light level has been determined is displayed in the display area SG10 (outputs sound).
(3) The lighting mode of the lighting pattern for confirmation is the same as the lighting pattern and the lighting luminance of “Production system A” of “Electric decoration table 2” in FIG. 69 (the number of repetitions of the lighting pattern is 2).
The configuration is as described above.

If NO in step 4202, in step 4208, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the volume adjustment screen is being displayed. In the case of Yes in step 4208, in step 4210, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 have been operated. In the case of Yes in step 4210, in step 4212, the CPUSC of the sub control board S changes the selected volume level and outputs a confirmation sound based on the operation of the cross key SB-2. Transition. In this embodiment, when adjusting the volume level,
(1) When a volume level is selected with the cross key SB-2, a confirmation sound corresponding to the selected volume level is output. (2) When the volume level is determined with the sub input button SB, the volume level is output. Is displayed in the display area SG10 (outputs sound) to notify which one has been determined.
(3) The volume of the confirmation sound is the same as the “non-error volume determination table” in FIG.
The configuration is as described above. A configuration in which the above-described volume adjustment screen is always displayed without outputting the confirmation sound (or is always displayed during symbol stop display, symbol variation display, etc.) may be applied.

  If NO in step 4208, in step 4214, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the customization execution screen is being displayed. In the case of Yes in step 4214, in step 4216, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 have been operated. In the case of Yes in step 4216, in step 4218, the CPUSC of the sub control board S switches on / off selection of automatic button operation based on the operation of the cross key SB-2, and proceeds to step 4220. In the present embodiment, when the automatic button operation setting is changed, when the on / off of the automatic button operation setting is determined with the cross key SB-2, an announcement corresponding to the on / off is displayed (ON Example of display: "Automatic button operation setting is turned on, automatic button operation setting is turned off by pressing the button during the game", Display example: "Automatic button operation setting is off Now, the automatic button operation setting is turned on by long-pressing the button during the game "). Note that if the result is No in step 4216, the process proceeds to the disposal 4220.

  Next, in step 4220, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub input button has been operated, in other words, whether or not the volume level, the light amount level, or the automatic button operation setting has been determined. If YES in step 4220, the process shifts to step 4224. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4220, in step 4222, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) has elapsed since the start of the customization screen display. In the case of Yes in step 4222, in step 4224, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the customization screen after determining the currently selected volume level, light amount level or automatic button operation setting (gaming machine customization setting). To do. As described above, in this embodiment, the gaming machine customization setting is determined when the sub input button SB is operated or when a predetermined time (5 seconds) has elapsed without operating the sub input button SB on the customization screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this. (1) Operation of the launch handle D44 is detected, (2) Symbol variation has started, (3) A predetermined entrance (for example, the first main entrance) The game machine customization setting may be determined when a game ball enters the game start opening A10). In addition, even if the design change of the decorative pattern is started while the customization screen is displayed, the customization screen remains displayed (the customization screen is displayed on the front layer rather than the change display of the decorative design), and the game machine customization is executed. You may comprise.

  Next, in step 4225, the CPUSC of the sub control board S resets and starts the non-game period measurement timer (increment timer). As described above, in this embodiment, it is determined that the non-game period starts from the timing at which the gaming machine customization setting is determined. Next, in step 4226, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the automatic button operation setting is determined to be on. In the case of Yes in step 4226, in step 4228, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the automatic button flag, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 3606). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4226, in step 4230, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the automatic button operation setting is determined to be off. In the case of Yes in step 4230, in step 4232, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the automatic button flag, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 3606). In addition, also when it is No in step 4214, step 4222, or step 4230, it transfers to the following process (process of step 3606).

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the display mode relating to the gaming machine customization from the start of the non-game period (timing when the measurement of the non-game period measurement timer HY10t is started) is “non-game period measurement timer value = 0 seconds. -> Start of non-game period "->" Non-game period measurement timer value = 5 seconds-> Start of display of the first customization guide screen, customization screen (customization screen, customization screen, light intensity adjustment screen and volume adjustment screen are collectively referred to as customization screen )) “Transitionable period start” → “Non-game period measurement timer value = 75 seconds → Start of display of second customization guide screen” → “Non-game period measurement timer value = 240 seconds → Start of display of standby demonstration screen, customization End of screen transition period ”→“ Non-game period measurement timer value = 900 seconds → Execute default setting, start displaying power-saving screen ” However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, “non-game period measurement timer value = 0 second → non-game period start” → “non-game period measurement timer value = 5 seconds → customizable screen transition period start (screen “No change in display)” → “Non-game period measurement timer value = 75 seconds → Start display of second customization guide screen, start lighting of lamps provided on sub input button SB and cross key SB-2” → “Non-game Period measurement timer value = 240 seconds → Start of display of standby demonstration screen, end of customizable screen transition period ”→“ Non-game period measurement timer value = 900 seconds → Execute default setting, start display of power saving screen ” It may be configured. Note that the start of the customizable screen transition period means that the period during which the customized screen is displayed by operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB-2.

  Next, FIG. 44 is an example of an image diagram of a customization guidance screen according to the present embodiment. First, the left part of the figure shows that the player has operated the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 when the first customization guide screen or the second customization guide screen is displayed on the effect display device SG. The display mode of the volume adjustment setting screen displayed in this case is shown. Specifically, when the first customization guide screen or the second customization guide screen is displayed, when the player operates the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2, the volume control screen is displayed. When the left button of the cross key SB-2 is pressed during display, the sound for confirmation from the speaker D24 is reduced, and the lit portion (white portion) of the volume display in the upper speaker schematic diagram is reduced. When the right button of the cross key SB-2 is pressed (indicating that the volume level is reduced), the sound for confirmation from the speaker D24 increases and the volume display in the upper speaker schematic diagram The lit part (white part) increases (indicating that the volume level increases), and the selected volume is pressed by pressing the sub input button SB. It is configured to be determined to the bell.

  Next, the middle part of the figure is displayed when the up / down button of the cross key SB-2 is operated when the first customization guide screen or the second customization guide screen is displayed on the effect display device SG. The display mode of the setting screen for adjusting the light amount is shown. Specifically, when the player operates the up / down button of the cross key SB-2, the light amount adjustment screen is displayed, and the first customization guide screen or the second customization guide screen is displayed while the light amount adjustment screen is displayed. When the upper button of the cross key SB-2 is pressed, the petal-like lighting parts displayed on the effect display device SG are “0 → 6 → 12” in three stages. When the lower button of the cross key SB-2 is pressed down (indicating that the light intensity level increases), the petal-shaped lighting portion displayed on the effect display device SG is 12 It is configured so that the light quantity level is reduced in three stages of 6 → 6 → 0 (indicating that the light intensity level becomes small), and the currently selected light intensity level is determined by pressing the sub input button SB. Yes. Even if the cross key SB-2 is operated when the standby demonstration screen is displayed, the volume adjustment screen and the light amount adjustment screen are not displayed, but the volume level and the light amount level itself can be changed. In the figure, the display corresponding to the light level is a petal-like display, and the lighting portion is configured to increase in three stages of “0 → 6 → 12”. Alternatively, the lighting part may be configured to increase in three stages of “1 → 2 → 3”, or three petal-shaped displays (with different display area sizes, The petals may be configured to increase in three stages: small, medium, and small petals) and “small → medium → large”.

  Next, the right part of the figure is displayed when the sub-input button SB is operated when the first customization guidance screen, the second customization guidance screen, or the standby demonstration screen is displayed on the effect display device SG. The display mode of the customization execution screen is shown. Specifically, when the player operates the sub input button SB, a customization screen is displayed. When the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 are pressed on the customization screen, the automatic button operation setting “ON” or “OFF” is set. The cursor is moved, and when the sub input button SB is pressed, the setting of the selected cursor is determined. Here, when it is determined to be “ON”, the automatic button operation setting screen is erased, and “Automatic button operation setting is turned on, automatic button operation is turned off by pressing the button during the game” is displayed. Is done. On the other hand, if it is determined as “OFF”, the automatic button operation setting screen disappears and “Automatic button operation setting is turned off. Automatic button operation is turned on by long-pressing the button during the game” is displayed. The

  Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the customization control process during game according to the subroutine of step 4250 in FIG. First, in step 4251, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the automatic button flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 4251, in step 4252, the CPUSC of the sub control board S makes a long press of the sub input button SB (in this process, it is a long press that the sub input button SB is continuously pressed for 1 second or more). ) Is detected. In this embodiment, the operation member for determining long press in step 4252 is the sub input button SB. However, the operation member is not limited to this, and may be the lever SB-3, or the sub input button SB and the lever. You may comprise so that any long press with SB-3 may be determined. In the case of Yes in step 4252, in step 4254, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the button effective period (button single press effect, button repeated press effect, button long press effect, or hidden button effect in the long press period. The period during which the operation of the sub input button SB is accepted due to the symbol variation = the period in which the effect is executed by operating the sub input button SB) or the lever effective period (lever single pull effect, lever continuous pull effect, lever extended effect, Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the period of receiving the operation of the lever SB-3 in the symbol variation for executing the hidden button effect = the period in which the effect is executed by operating the lever SB-3) is not straddled. Here, the case where the long press period extends over the button effective period (or lever effective period) means that (1) the sub input button SB starts to be pressed before the button effective period (or lever effective period) starts. Then, the sub input button SB is kept pressed for 1 second, and if the button is valid for 1 second, (2) the sub input button SB is pushed during the button valid period (or lever valid period). After that, the sub input button SB is kept pressed for 1 second, and the button effective period (or lever effective period) is not reached when the 1 second has elapsed (the button effective period has ended). . In the case of Yes in step 4254, in step 4256, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the non-game period measurement timer value is smaller than the first guidance value (5 seconds in this example). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the non-game period has elapsed for 5 seconds or longer, the first customization guide screen is displayed, so that the automatic button operation setting change by long pressing the sub input button SB is invalid. The sub-input button SB starts to be pressed before the non-game period of 5 seconds elapses, and then the sub-input button SB is held down for 1 second. Even if it has elapsed, the change of the automatic button operation setting by long pressing the sub input button SB is invalid. In the case of Yes in step 4256, in step 4258, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is a symbol variation that executes the hidden button effect. In the case of Yes in step 4258, in step 4260, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the automatic button flag, and proceeds to step 4264. Note that if the result is No in step 4252, step 4254, step 4256, or step 4258, the process proceeds to step 4264.

If NO in step 4251, in other words, if the automatic button flag is ON, in step 4262, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the operation of the sub input button SB has been detected. If YES in step 4262, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the automatic button flag in step 4263 and proceeds to step 4264. Note that if the result of Step 4262 is No, the process proceeds to Step 4264. In this embodiment, when the automatic button flag is on, the automatic button flag is turned off when the sub input button is pressed once. When the sub input button is held down, the automatic button flag is turned off. The flag may be configured to be turned off, or may be configured not to be turned off. In addition, when the automatic button flag is on during the game, as a specific example of turning off the automatic button flag by operating the sub input button SB,
(1) Button automatic input at the time of executing a button effect (button single press effect, button continuous press effect, button long press effect) (the automatic button flag is on, so that the button repeated effect etc. can be performed without operating the sub input button SB) If the player operates the sub input button SB before the button is automatically executed),
(2) When the player operates the sub input button SB during the button automatic input in the button continuous hit effect or the button long press effect,
(3) When the player operates the sub input button SB during the execution of the notice effect without automatic button input,
Etc. can be illustrated.

  Next, in step 4264, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the operation of the up / down button of the cross key SB-2 is detected. In the case of Yes in step 4264, in step 4266, the CPUSC of the sub control board S adjusts the light amount level based on the operation of the cross key SB-2, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 3606). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4264, in step 4268, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 is detected. In the case of Yes in step 4268, in step 4270, the CPUSC of the sub control board S adjusts the volume level based on the operation of the cross key SB-2, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 3606). In addition, also when it is No in step 4269, it transfers to the following process (process of step 3606). As described above, in this embodiment, the light amount level and the volume level can be adjusted by operating the cross key SB-2 even when it is not a non-game period. Specifically, the cross key SB-2 is configured. The upper button increases the light level by one level, the lower button of the cross key SB-2 decreases the light level by one level, the right button of the cross key SB-2 increases the volume by one level, and the left side of the cross key SB-2. The volume increases by one step with the button. In the present embodiment, an effect of operating the cross key SB-2 in an effect during the game (for example, a button effect) (an effect in which a notice effect or the like is executed by operating the cross key SB-2) is provided. However, when such an effect is provided, it is impossible to adjust the light level and the volume level by operating the cross key SB-2 during the effective period of the cross key SB-2 in the effect. It is desirable to configure. In addition, the operation other than the volume and the amount of light may be changed by operating the cross key SB-2. For example, the production mode (changing the occurrence probability of a specific production or changing the tendency of the production to be performed is different. May be configured to be changeable. In such a configuration, for example, the volume and effect mode can be changed by operating the cross key SB-2 while the symbols are changing, and the volume and light intensity can be changed by operating the cross key SB-2 while the standby demonstration screen is displayed. The production mode may be changeable. While the symbol is changing (or during the symbol change and 5 seconds before the start of the non-game period), the volume level can be adjusted by operating the cross key SB-2, while the cross key SB-2 can be adjusted. You may comprise so that adjustment of the light quantity level by operation is impossible.

  Next, FIG. 46 is a flowchart of music selection processing according to the subroutine of step 3700 in FIG. First, in step 3702, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a jackpot that can select a song is being executed. In other words, depending on the type of jackpot to be executed (type of jackpot symbol) and the game status when the jackpot is won (when the jackpot symbol is stopped), the music can be selected or not, for example, it stops in a short time The music can be selected only in the case of the symbol 7B (10-round probability variation big hit in the second main game stop symbol), and the music can not be selected in other big hits. In the case of Yes in step 3702, in step 3704, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a jackpot / medium music selection process, which will be described later, which is a process for allowing the player to select a music during the jackpot. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3702, in step 3706, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is currently running short (non-stochastic variation gaming state and time shortening gaming state, or probability variation gaming state and time shortening gaming state). It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 3706, in step 3708, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a short / medium music selection process that is a process for allowing the player to select a music during a short time (time-saving gaming state), which will be described later. To do. In addition, after the end of step 3704, after the end of step 3708, or in the case of No in step 3706, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3800).

  Next, FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the jackpot music selection process according to the subroutine of step 3704 in FIG. First, in step 3704-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is a music selection valid period (a period during which music selection is possible). Supplementing the music selection valid period, the jackpot start demo time (the period from the start of the jackpot until the opening of the first round winning opening in the jackpot) and the jackpot end demo time (the big of the last round in the jackpot) During the period from the end of opening the winning opening until the end of the jackpot, music selection is impossible. In addition, in the jackpot that can select a song, a selection time of a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds) is set after the jackpot start demo time ends, and (1) when the sub input button SB is pressed to determine a song, (2) When a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds) elapses without any button operation (operation of the sub input button SB and the cross key SB-2) after the end of the big hit start demo time, (3) the cross key SB- 2 When a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds) has elapsed after the upper button or the lower button (sometimes referred to as an up / down button) is operated, The music on which the cursor is located is determined, and the music selection valid period ends. In other words, after operating the up / down button of the cross key SB-2 from the start of opening the first prize winning opening in the first round (after the end of the jackpot start demo time) and then operating the up / down button of the cross key SB-2 By operating the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2 again before a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds), the music selection effective period is continued across rounds, and the music selection effective period is until the end of the final round in the big hit It is also possible to continue. If the specification is such that the music on which the cursor is positioned is forcibly determined at the end of a specific round, the music being selected is determined against the player's intention, which is not desirable for the player. In particular, the more songs that are selected, the more time is required for song selection (song confirmation time per song × number of selected songs = music selection time), so that the music selection time is sufficient as in the present invention. The configuration that can be secured works effectively. If the music is not determined until the end of the final round in the jackpot, the music determined at the start of the jackpot is taken over to the time-reduced game state after the jackpot ends and output. That is, it is processing that considers that the player did not intend to select. When the remaining music selection effective period is 5 seconds, a countdown display is started in order to notify the player of the remaining time. Needless to say, the display is not limited to the countdown display using an image, and a configuration in which notification is given by voice, LED lighting, or the like, or a combination of these may be used.

  If Yes in step 3704-1, in step 3704-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the up / down button of the cross key SB-2 has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 3704-2, in step 3704-3, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects the music (first option) corresponding to the operation of the up / down button, outputs the selected music, Control goes to step 3704-4. At this time, the output of the selected music is started from a point in the middle of a predetermined music (for example, immediately before entering the chorus or chorus). In addition, when starting output from a point in the middle of a song, it is preferable to configure so that the player can immediately determine which song by listening to the song, just before entering the chorus or chorus, With such a configuration, the player can easily select a desired music piece. In particular, when there are a large number of selectable music pieces, the music selection time by the player becomes long, so that it works more effectively. When “Random” (second option) for selecting music on the gaming machine side is selected, when “Random” is selected, and when no music is selected (no music is determined). If only (1), (2), (3), which are the conditions for determining the above-mentioned music, are output, it is determined that “Random” has been determined. Then, the music is determined by selecting the music when “Random” to be described later is selected, and output of the determined music is started in step 3704-8 to be described later. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3704-2, the process proceeds to step 3704-4. When outputting a dedicated music that is output only when “Random” is selected, it may be output from the beginning of the music (started) or may be output from the middle.

  The point in the middle of the music is not limited to the illustrated chorus or just before entering the chorus, and it is also possible to play back from a characteristic riff in the music. Further, in the case of music starting from chorus, output (starting from the beginning) of the music = starting from chorus, such a configuration may be used.

Also, as an output method starting from rust,
(1) A method of reproducing from a predetermined reproduction point using one piece of music data (2) Either of two patterns of a method of separately providing music data starting from rust may be used. In the latter case, since the time until the player decides after setting the cursor on the music is set to a predetermined time (7 seconds), the music data started from the chorus is a predetermined time (7 seconds). It is enough to prepare data that is a little over.

  Next, in step 3704, it is determined whether or not the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 have been operated. In the case of Yes in step 3704-4, in step 3704-5, the CPUSC of the sub control board S changes the character displayed on the liquid crystal in response to the operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2, and responds accordingly. Start outputting music. At this time, as in the case where the up / down button of the cross key SB-2 is operated, the output of the music is started from a point in the middle of the predetermined music (for example, immediately before entering the chorus or chorus). On the other hand, if No at step 3704-4, the process proceeds to step 3704-6.

  Next, in step 3704-6, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub input button SB has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 3704-6, in step 3704-8, the currently selected music is determined, and output of the determined music is started. In step 3704-8, output is started from the beginning of the determined music. If NO in step 3704-6, in step 3704-7, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether it is the timing of the end of the music selection valid period. Also in the case of Yes in step 3704-7, the process proceeds to step 3704-8, and determination and output of music are started. After step 3704-8 is completed, the process proceeds to step 3704-9 if NO in step 3704-1 or NO in step 3704-7.

  Next, in step 3704-9, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the music has been determined. In the case of Yes in step 3704-9, in step 3704-10, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S produces an effect (an effect that is a big hit, for example, an effect for notifying the probability change, an effect for notifying the round promotion) ), It is determined whether or not it is the button valid period. In the case of Yes in step 3704-10, in step 3704-12, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the up / down button of the cross key SB-2 has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 3704-12, in step 3704-13, the CPUSC of the sub control board S changes the light amount in response to the operation of the up / down button of the ten key SB-2, and displays an image showing the light amount on the liquid crystal. After (for example, refer to FIG. 44), the process proceeds to step 3704-14. Note that if the result is No in step 3704-12, the process proceeds to step 3704-14. Next, in step 3704-14, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an operation of the left button or the right button (sometimes referred to as a left / right button) of the cross key SB-2 has been performed. In the case of Yes in step 3704-14, in step 3704-15, the CPUSC of the sub control board S changes the volume corresponding to the operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2, and displays an image indicating the volume on the liquid crystal (effect Display on the display device SG) (see, for example, FIG. 44), and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3800). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3704-10, control corresponding to the operation effect of the sub input button SB is executed in step 3704-11, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3800). In the case of No in step 3704-9 and in the case of No in step 3704-14, the process proceeds to the next process (step 3800).

Note that the following configuration may be used when a power failure occurs and the power is restored after the jackpot is not yet determined (in a situation where the jackpot is being executed and the song has not been determined). Good.
(1) A jackpot effect dedicated to power recovery is executed (BGM corresponding to the jackpot effect dedicated to power recovery is output), making music selection impossible. In this case, when the time saving gaming state is reached after the big hit, the music selected at the start of the big hit is output instead of the BGM corresponding to the special big hit effect at the time of power recovery.
(2) In the round in which the power is restored, the display mode of the liquid crystal screen (display area SG10 of the effect display device SG), the sound output mode, and the LED lighting mode are modes exclusively used at the time of power recovery (for example, the liquid crystal screen is “screen return” "No sound", LED is not output, etc.) When the next round of power recovery, the LCD screen display mode, sound output mode, and LED lighting mode before power failure occurs are restored. The jackpot production will continue.

  Next, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the short / medium tune selection process according to the subroutine of step 3708 in FIG. First, in step 3708-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the music selection screen is displayed. In the case of Yes in step 3708-1, in step 3708-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs the music selection screen display timing (for example, the super reach is executed, the loss symbol is stopped, and the normal screen return timing thereafter, It is determined whether or not the jackpot end demo time end time, etc.). In the case of Yes in step 3708-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays a music selection screen in step 3708-3, and proceeds to step 3708-4. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3708-1, the process proceeds to step 3708-4 also in the case of No in step 3708-2.

  Next, in step 3708-4, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the music selection is valid. In the case of Yes in step 3708-4, in step 3708-5, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub control board S is executing a specific effect (for example, a specific character zone and a pre-read zone effect, details will be described later). Determine. If YES in step 3708-5, the flow advances to step 3708-9. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3708-5, in step 3708-6, the CPUSC of the sub control board S erases the music selection screen, and proceeds to step 3708-9. During the specific performance, the music selection screen is erased from the liquid crystal, but the music can be selected. However, the music in the music selection is not output, and the BGM corresponding to the specific effect remains output. That is, even if the player operates the cross key SB-2 during execution of the specific effect, the BGM corresponding to the specific effect remains output, but the music output after the execution of the specific effect is This may be different from the music that was output before the start of. In addition, the start timing of the specific effect is, for example, (1) start of fluctuation, (2) a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) after the start of fluctuation, and (3) a specific time after the predetermined time after the start of fluctuation ( For example, after 3.15 seconds). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3708-4, in step 3708-7, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is a BGM change notice (a notice that the BGM changes from the start of change, for example, it is almost definite that it will be a big hit. Or the expectation degree of jackpot is relatively high). In the case of Yes in step 3708-7, in step 3708-8, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the music selection screen and proceeds to step 3708-9. Note that if the answer is No in step 3708-7, the process proceeds to step 3708-9.

  Next, in step 3708-9, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the up / down button of the cross key SB-2 has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 3708-9, in step 3708-10, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects (determines) the music corresponding to the operation of the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2. The selection of music by the operation of the up / down buttons of SB-2 = determination of music is performed. Hereinafter, “selection (decision)” may be described}, and output of the corresponding music is started. At this time, the output is started not from the beginning of the music but from a predetermined halfway point (for example, rust). In the case of the BGM change notice, the music selection display screen may not change even if the up / down button of the cross key SB-2 is operated, and the music may not be changed. The change notice is different from the normal notice (in the situation where the music selection screen is displayed, the music can be selected by operating the up and down buttons during the normal notice, but the up and down buttons can be selected during the BGM change. Therefore, it is suggested that the current fluctuation is highly expected. In addition, the production mode of the BGM change notice is not limited to this, and when the BGM change notice is executed, a dedicated BGM is output when the BGM change notice is executed, and the music name on which the cursor is located on the music selection screen is displayed. A dedicated BGM at the time of execution of the BGM change notice may be displayed, and music may not be selected by operating the up and down buttons. After step 3708-10 is completed, or if step 3708-9 is No, the process proceeds to step 3708-11. Next, in step 3708-11, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 have been operated. In the case of Yes in step 3708-11, in step 3708-12, the CPUSC of the sub control board S changes the volume corresponding to the operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 and displays an image showing the volume on the liquid crystal. (See, for example, FIG. 44), and the process proceeds to Step 3708-13. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 3708-11, the process proceeds to step 3708-13. Next, in step 3708-13, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not there is a music change. In the case of Yes in step 3708-13, in step 3708-14, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is set to switch to the background image corresponding to the determined music at the start timing of the next change, and the next change starts. Switch the background image at the timing. After the end of step 3708-14 or in the case of No in step 3708-13, the process proceeds to the next process (step 3800).

  That is, in the jackpot music selection process, the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2 are used to change and select the music one by one until the music is determined (the music is selected by operating the sub input button SB). Left and right buttons are used to change the character and change and select the song corresponding to the character (changed to the first song of the song corresponding to the character), after the song is determined The up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2 are used to change the light quantity of the LED, and the left and right buttons are used to change the volume. With this configuration, it is possible to realize various presentation displays and sound outputs without providing an operation unit (for example, a button) corresponding to the sub-control board S side more than necessary. In the short / medium music selection process, the music is selected (determined) only by operating the up / down buttons of the cross key SB-2, and the music can be changed by a simple operation from the big hit.

In addition to the embodiment described above, the following configuration is also possible.
(1) When one of the cross key SB-2 (up / down / left / right button) and the sub input button SB is operated, only the previously operated button operation (one operation) is valid. Yes, the button operation (the other operation) operated later becomes invalid.
(2) When the other operation is performed during one operation of the cross key SB-2 (up / down / left / right button) and the sub input button SB, the previously operated button operation (one operation) Since it is processed as if there was an operation at the time of pressing, the button operation (the other operation) operated later is also effective.
(3) When the power is cut off and then restored, if the configuration includes a backup, the music may have been selected before the power was turned off. If the configuration does not include a backup, the default music may be restored.
(4) When the power is cut off and then the power is restored, the liquid crystal image is restored earlier in the liquid crystal image and the sound output, but the music cannot be selected (the music can be selected).
(5) When the power is cut off and then restored, the sound output is restored earlier between the liquid crystal image and the sound output, and the music cannot be selected (the music can be selected).
(6) The music can be selected for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) after the power is cut off during the time reduction, and then the power is restored. However, since the sound is output when the power is restored, the selected music is output. Not.
(7) The music can be selected for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) after the power interruption occurs during the time reduction and then the power is restored, and the selected music is output together with the sound output when the power is restored.
(8) The music cannot be selected for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) after the power interruption occurs during the time reduction and then the power is restored, and the music can be selected after the sound output at the time of power restoration is completed. Become.
(9) Production that does not occur in a situation where the selected music is being output or a movable body accessory that does not operate (movable body accessory other than the movable body accessory YK) is provided. For example, in the situation where a song with a short time is output, a performance that occurs only in a low probability and non-short time (non-stochastic variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state) is naturally not performed, and high expectation There may be provided a movable accessory that operates only when BGM or SE (sound effect) is produced.
(10) BGM change in low probability and non-short time (non-probability variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state) (from normal background BGM, tempering BGM, reach development BGM, reach production BGM, prefetch stage BGM, pseudo The change to the continuous BGM or the like) is triggered by a symbol stop or a symbol (drawing) temporary stop, but the BGM can be changed by the player's operation during a short period of time.
(11) If the music is changed with the up and down buttons of the cross button SB-2 while the fluctuation is stopped in the short time (time saving game state), the background image may be changed immediately or the next fluctuation starts It may change from time to time.
(12) Instead of selecting (or determining) music by operating the cross key SB-2, it may be configured (selecting) music by operating the sub input button SB.
(13) The background image (so-called production stage, production mode) can be changed by operating the cross key SB-2 or the sub input button SB, and BGM corresponding to the background image may be output.

Next, FIG. 49 is an image diagram of the music selection screen during the big hit. First, the figure on the left is a music selection screen that is displayed when the jackpot start demo time ends. A character (elephant in this figure) is displayed on the left side of the middle part of the liquid crystal screen, and a cursor indicating a plurality of music pieces and a music piece being selected is displayed on the right side of the middle part of the liquid crystal screen (in this figure, music A is selected). The cursor is selected and selected). On the lower left of the LCD screen, a character image of “Character selection” indicating that the character can be selected and a left button and a right button indicating that the left and right buttons can be operated are displayed. Displays a character image of “select music” indicating that the music can be selected and an upper button and a lower button indicating that the up and down buttons can be operated. A character image of “decision” indicating the decision and an image of the sub input button SB are displayed. In addition, on the left of the upper part of the LCD screen, the display of the number of rounds and the middle of the villa (the renso is a non-probable and non-short-time winning jackpot to a non-probable and non-short-time again. In the case of having a mode (a mode in which a gaming state is not notified, for example, it may be configured to be in a latent mode with a certain change and non-short time), the latent mode may also be regarded as being in a consecutive resort. (End may also mean returning to normal mode) Total number of winnings displayed in the number of appearances earned in the upper part of the LCD screen, "Please select a song" character image, LCD screen On the upper right side, an image display (right-handed display) of “→ right-handed →” indicating that a game ball should be fired on the right side (right-handed route) of the game board is performed. In the case of character selection, the music display is also changed, the music corresponding to the character is moved to the cursor, and when the corresponding character is changed due to the music change, the character display is also changed. Although not shown in this figure, when the total number of acquisitions (display) exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 5000 or 10,000, which is a good number), “5000 OVER” or “10000 OVER” In addition, image display and sound (SE) output indicating that the predetermined number has been exceeded are performed. At this time, the volume of the music is reduced, and the volume of the sound (SE) indicating that the predetermined number is exceeded may be configured to be higher than the volume of the music. Back to). Furthermore, as a plurality of displayed songs, “???” may be displayed when there are still songs that cannot be selected, or “???” is not displayed and newly added. You may comprise so that the said music may be displayed only to. When “???” is displayed, “???” cannot be selected, and “???” may not be aligned with the cursor position. Specifically, in this figure, the music A is currently selected, and when the down button of the cross key SB-2 is operated in this state, the music moves down one by one, so that the cursor "Random" will be matched to the position. Here, when the down button of the cross key SB-2 is operated again, the music moves further down one by one, so that “????” is set at the cursor position. "?" Is a song that cannot be selected yet, so "????" does not match the cursor position (that is, the cursor jumps over "???"), and another song in the next display order {e.g. The cursor is positioned on the music I} in the music list (normally selected) in FIG. 52 (the cursor position is moved by two musics by operating the cross key SB-2 once). Note that the sound while the cursor jumps over “???” may be any of the following.
(1) Cursor movement sound effect (music is not played)
(2) Play the song before “????” as it is (When the song is over “???”, play the next song)
(3) Silence However, for example, when “???” is continuously arranged over several songs, it takes time until the cursor jumps over. (3) When silence is set, a sense of incongruity occurs. It is desirable to configure as (2).

  Next, the figure on the right side is a liquid crystal screen during a big hit after the music is determined. The music selection screen is deleted, and a display corresponding to the selected music (or character) (in this figure, an elephant jackpot effect) is performed. As the image displayed after selecting the song, the remaining number of rounds (the number that can be entered in the big prize opening) is displayed as “◯” in the upper center of the LCD screen, and the song is displayed in the lower row of the LCD screen. The lyrics are displayed. The display of the other round numbers, the total acquired number display, and the right-handed display are continuously displayed from the music selection screen. Note that the display of “◯” indicating the remaining count number is erased one by one every time the player enters the winning prize opening, and the display for the maximum count number is performed again at the next round. The display of the count number may be displayed only when the song selection is a big hit, or may be displayed at other big wins. May be displayed in any big hit as long as it is a big hit that can win a game.

  Next, FIG. 50 is an image diagram of a music selection screen during a short time. The upper left figure is a diagram showing a music selection screen during changing time, and music I having music number 09 (“# 09”) is selected. Since the background image corresponding to the music I is giraffe (see FIG. 52 for the correspondence between the music and the background image), the giraffe is displayed as the background image. When a new song is added due to the previous big hit, “NEW” is displayed in the number of the newly added song (in this figure, “NEW” is displayed in “# 10”). Can recognize that it is a newly added song. Note that while the time is short, the music can be selected regardless of whether the fluctuation is stopped or during the fluctuation. In any case, the background image (character image) is changed at the start of the next fluctuation (FIG. 48). Step 3708-14 etc.) can be simplified. Next, in the upper right figure, the fluctuation time ends (here, 5 seconds later), and the upper button of the cross key SB-2 is operated, and the music is changed from music No. 09 to music No. 10 of No. 10. ing. “# 10 Music J” is displayed at the cursor position, and the display of “NEW” is erased when the cursor position is set. Since the background images corresponding to the music piece J are elephants and lions, elephants and lions are displayed in the background image. It should be noted that the display of “NEW” may not be erased only by matching the cursor position but may be erased by the next big hit. Next, the lower (right) figure is a diagram showing the case where a specific effect (in this figure, a penguin effect) in which the background image changes occurs during the time reduction. During the specific effect, the music selection screen is erased. Yes. However, music selection is possible even if the music selection screen is deleted. In addition, since the output sound is BGM corresponding to the specific effect, the volume of BGM by music selection is zero. In other words, BGM or SE corresponding to a specific effect and music selected by music selection are configured to be output on different channels, so that music can be selected even during the specific effect. It is configured to enable output. It should be noted that the lyrics of the selected music are not displayed in the short time. Although not shown in the figure, the hold display may be performed during normal fluctuations in the time reduction, the hold display may be erased when the specific effect occurs, and the hold display may be performed again when the specific effect ends. . That is, even if a game ball enters the second main game start port B10 (or the first main game start port A10) during the specific effect, the second main game symbol hold display part B21h (or the first main game symbol hold) Although the new hold is displayed on the display unit A21h), the new display is not displayed on the effect display device SG, and the effect display device SG newly displays the timing when the specific effect ends and the hold display becomes possible. The hold that entered the ball will be displayed. Furthermore, since the hold is not displayed during the specific effect, there is a possibility that it will be a big hit with the change in the hold that has changed due to the change in the color or shape of the hold display displayed on the effect display device SG. No directing). When it is determined that the hold change is made during the specific effect, the hold display that is changed in hold is performed at a timing at which the specific effect ends and the hold display becomes possible. In addition, the hold pre-reading effect during the time reduction can be generated only for the hold related to the second main game symbol, and the hold pre-reading effect during the non-time saving can be generated only for the hold related to the first main game symbol. It is also possible to do.

  Next, FIG. 51 is a transition diagram of the liquid crystal screen when a big hit is made during the time saving. First, the upper left diagram shows that the music B is selected in a short time. Next, it becomes a big hit, and it moves to the upper right figure. Here, the music B is placed at the cursor position as the music selection screen at the start of the big hit. That is, the music (song B in this figure) that was selected during the time before the big hit starts is displayed at the cursor position as the initial selected music on the music selection screen at the start of the big hit. Next, the diagram moves to the lower left figure. Here, the song C is selected (changed from the song B to the song C) by operating the upper button of the cross key SB-2. Thereafter, the music piece C is determined by the operation of the sub input button SB or after the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds from the operation of the up / down buttons). Next, when the big hit ends, the process proceeds to the lower right figure. It is a liquid crystal screen at the time of short-time start after the big hit, and the music C determined during the big hit is displayed as the initial music at the time of the short-time start (that is, the music C is displayed at the cursor position). In this way, when the player selects a song during the short time, the music selected by the player during the short time is displayed at the cursor position as the initial music as the music selection screen during the big hit, and the player When the music is selected and determined, the music selected by the player during the big hit is displayed as the initial music at the cursor position as the music selection screen during the short time. By configuring in this way, it is possible to continuously output the same music during the short time and during the big hit without changing the music selected and determined by the player on the gaming machine side.

  Next, FIG. 52 is an example of a music list that is a big hit or a short time. First, the upper music list (when selection is not possible) shows the specifications of the music and the jackpot end demo time that are output in the jackpot jackpot effect where music selection is impossible. In these jackpot productions, music corresponding to the corresponding special jackpot is output, so that music selection is impossible. In addition, when the music is selected, it is not possible to select the music during the big hit. At the time of the first hit (low probability and big hit from non-temporal short), it is configured to be “CHALLENGE BONUS” that cannot be selected music, and the big hit of the second main game symbol (for example, if the time is short, music selection) Even in the case of the stop symbol 7B) which becomes possible “HYPER BONUS”, music selection is impossible. Also, even if there is a probable big hit (for example, a big win by the stop symbol 7A) of the first main game symbol that is probable and continues to be probable due to high probability and short time, a big hit effect in which music selection is impossible is executed. It is configured as follows. Next, the middle music list (when normally selected) will be described. The music list is used when music selection is possible. In other words, (1) When the big hit effect by the second main game symbol is “HYPER BONUS” (10 round probability big hit by stop symbol 7B during the short time), (2) Short and medium (low probability and short time, or high probability and (Short time). During normal selection, music (or music numbers) are displayed on the music selection screen in the order of numbers shown in the music list. When the up / down button of the cross key SB-2 is operated during a big hit or during a short time, the display of the music is changed corresponding to the operation of the up / down button in the order of the numbers shown in the music list. Further, when the character is changed by operating the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 on the big hit music selection screen, the music of the next character is selected. For example, when elephant / music A is selected as the character, if the right button of the cross key SB-2 is operated, the lion / music D is selected as the character, and then the right again. When the button is operated, the giraffe / music tune G is selected as the character. In this way, selection by character and selection for each piece of music can be performed by operating the cross key SB-2 (up / down / left / right buttons). Note that music J to music N are music that can be selected when a predetermined condition (open condition) is satisfied.

  Next, the lower tune list (selection order when selecting “Random”) will be described. The music list is arranged in the order in which music is selected when “Random” is selected. In addition, when “Omakase” is selected during the big hit or during the short time after the first hit, the starting music is determined by lottery. If “Omakase” continues to be selected after that, the music at the start of the big hit The music is selected according to the order of the list. A specific example will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the composition is such that the music can be selected only at the jackpot (“HYPER BONUS”) that has the highest expected output expectation during the short time period and continues to be probable, but is not limited to this. If the jackpot with the highest expected expectation of winning is the jackpot (for example, the 10th round jackpot), the music can be selected, and if the other jackpot (for example, the fourth round jackpot), the music cannot be selected. Well, it is configured to be able to select a song with a jackpot that will allow you to win a game and continue to be probable (it will be in a probability-changing gaming state after the jackpot ends), making it difficult to get a game (playing towards the big prize opening) Even if you keep firing the ball, only a small number of game balls will enter the big prize opening.) After the big hit, the probability fluctuation gaming state will not be entered after the big hit (non-stochastic fluctuation gaming state). In a short time, or the big hit is relatively small game ball number to be paid out at jackpot is also possible to configure so as to be impossible music selection.

  Next, FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of music transition. First, (a) will be described. (A) shows the music transition when the player does not select the music (the cross key SB-2 or the sub input button SB is not operated). Specifically, a high-probability and short-running initial music (a music that is output when a probability-variable game state and a time-reduced game state are reached after the jackpot is completed) is a mission after the first hit (CHALLENGE BONUS) (see FIG. 83). ), The music corresponds to the character selected by the player, and is the music A here. Next, since the music selection was not performed with high probability and in a short time, the music A is still selected. Next, “Omakase” is selected as the initial position of the music that is a big hit, and the music E is selected by lottery of the starting music related to “Omakase”. If it is not changed from the initial music with a high probability and a short time, it is configured to be forcibly changed to “Random” at the start of the big hit. Next, the music change is not performed during the big hit, the cursor remains “Random”, and the music E at the initial position of the big hit is continuously selected as the initial position of the music with high probability and short time. If there is no change in the music with a high probability and the next jackpot occurs, the song D is selected according to the “music list (selection order when“ Random ”” is selected) ”(see FIG. 52) as the initial song position during the jackpot Has been. In other words, when “Random” is selected, the music is changed at the start of the big hit. Next, the music initial position at the time of the big hit is selected as the initial position of the music at the high probability and the short time when the big hit ends without the music being changed during the big hit and the high probability and the time is short again. ing. Next, the feature point (b) will be described. In (b), the music A is selected as the initial music with a high probability and a short time, and then the player selects “Random” as the music selection. At this time, the starting music is drawn in the same manner as in (a) (here, the music E is won). Then, when a big hit occurs, the music D is selected according to the “music list (selection order when“ Random ”” is selected) ”(see FIG. 52) as the initial position of the music during the big hit. Next, (c) will be described. In (c), the music A is selected as the initial music with a high probability and a short time, and then the music K is selected as the music selection by the player. Thereafter, the music K is continuously selected until the player changes the music. Since the music is not changed here, the music K is continuously selected. Next, (d) will be described. In (d), the music A is selected as the initial music with a high probability and a short time, and then the music K is selected as the music selection by the player. Next, although a big hit occurs, the music K that has been selected as the music with high probability and short time is continuously selected as the music initial position during the big hit. Next, the music is changed during the big hit and the music M is selected. Thereafter, the music M is continuously selected until the player changes the music. Next, (e) will be described. In (e), the music A is selected as the high probability and short-duration initial music, and then the music K is selected as the music selection by the player. Next, although a big hit occurs, the music K that has been selected as the music with high probability and short time is continuously selected as the music initial position during the big hit. Next, “Random” is selected as the music selection by the player during the big hit, and the music E is selected by lottery of the starting music. If the music is not changed by the player, every time a big hit occurs, the next music (here, as the initial position of the music in the big hit, according to the “music list (selection order when“ Random ”” is selected) ”(refer to FIG. 52) Then, the music D) is selected. It should be noted that the determination sound may be output as “picone” when the music is determined, and when the music is determined only by the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2, the determination sound is output. May be configured not to be output. For example, since the music is determined by the operation of the sub input button SB during the big hit, the music A → the upper button operation → the music B (from rust) → the operation of the sub input button SB → the determination sound “picone” → the music B ( From the beginning, the music is changed, and during time reduction, the music is determined only by the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2, regardless of the operation of the sub input button SB. The music is changed in the order of the decision sound “picone” → music B. As described above, it is troublesome if a decision sound is output every time the up / down button is operated during the time reduction, so the music is determined by the operation of the up / down button during the time reduction, but it may be configured so that the determination sound is not output. Good.

  Here, although not shown in the figure, a case where “Random” is selected (determined) a plurality of times in a short time will be described (during the big hit, the music (“ "Omakase" is included), and the music is determined only once). For example, when “Omakase” is selected at a high probability and in a short time, it is assumed that the music E is selected (determined) by lottery of the starting music. Next, when the music data is changed to another music (for example, music D) by operating the up / down buttons of the cross key SB-2, the music D is output until the music is changed again. Thereafter, when “Random” is selected (determined) again by operating the up and down buttons of the sub input button SB, the starting music piece is also drawn at this time. In addition, since the jackpot start demo time and the jackpot end demo time are not touched here, it should be supplemented that the jackpot start demonstration time when the jackpot is hit from the short time is selected to perform the jackpot introduction effect. The music that is present is not output. However, in the big hit end demo time, if the big hit that can select the music in the consecutive Chan, the big hit end demo time is set short, the selected music will continue to be output, and it will enter into the short time as it is. Become. Also, in promotion productions that ask whether or not the number of rounds will be promoted (whether it will be from 4 rounds to 10 rounds), it is impossible to select music during the production, and the music after successful promotion or failure Selection may be possible. From another point of view, even if the same 10 round big hit, there is a period in which the music selection is not possible in the big hit where the promotion effect is executed, and there is no period in which the music cannot be selected in the big hit where the promotion effect is not executed. It can be said. Furthermore, when a specific effect (effect that deletes the music selection screen) is executed instead of the reach effect, if the music is changed by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2, the specific effect is being performed. May be configured such that the BGM dedicated to the specific effect is output, the specific effect ends, and the output of the music changed from the start of the next variation starts, or the specific effect ends (from the specific effect to the normal screen) It may be configured such that the output of the changed music is started upon returning.

  Next, transition of music and background images in one change during time reduction will be described using the “transition diagram of music change and background change during time reduction” in the lower part of FIG. First, at the start of the change, the music A is selected, and the character A corresponding to the music A is displayed in the background image. Next, the music piece D is changed during the change by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2 of the player during the change. However, since the background image is not immediately changed, the character A remains as it is. Next, when it develops to reach production, since the reach production corresponding to the music A selected at the start of fluctuation is performed, the BGM is also changed to the reach production BGM corresponding to the music A. In other words, in this embodiment, the reach production corresponding to the selected music is developed, but the reach production is determined at the start of the fluctuation, so even if the music is changed during the fluctuation, The reach effect corresponding to the music selected at the start is executed. Next, when the reach effect is lost, the screen returns to the normal screen during the change. At this time, the BGM is not output (the music D may be output), and the background image is still the next change. Since there is no character A, it becomes character A. Next, when the next change start time is reached, the music D is displayed, and the character B is displayed as the background image. By configuring in this way, even if the music is changed immediately before the reach effect, the reach effect can be executed without any problem and without increasing the processing load during the change.

  Next, FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the hold information management process according to the subroutine of step 3800 in FIG. First, in step 3802, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a new hold occurrence command (hold information relating to the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol) is received from the main control board M side. To do. In the case of Yes in step 3802, in step 3804, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the drawing hold counter (in this example, up to 4 for the first main game and up to 4 for the second main game) to “ 1 "is added (incremented). Next, in step 3806, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is based on the hold occurrence command transmitted from the main control board M side, and holds the hold information (in particular, a random value related to the main game symbol lottery, for example, a lottery determination) The random number / design lottery random number / variation mode lottery random number) is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and the process proceeds to Step 3816.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3802, in step 3808, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a symbol variation display start instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 3808, in step 3810, the CPUSC of the sub control board S subtracts (decrements) “1” from the drawing suspension counter. Next, in step 3812, the CPUSC of the sub control board S shifts the hold information related to the symbol variation to the remaining hold information. Next, in step 3814, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 3816. In the case of No in step 3808, the process proceeds to step 3816 without executing the processes in steps 3810 to 3814. Next, in step 3816, the CPUSC of the sub control board S has the same number of hold display lamps as the drawing hold counter value on the effect display device SG (particularly, the first hold display portion SG12 and the second hold display portion SG13). Is displayed and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3900).

  Next, FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 3900 in FIG. First, in step 3902, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3902, in step 3904, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the symbol content determination permission flag. Next, in step 3906, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the variation pattern of the decorative design and temporarily stores it in the RAM area of the sub control board S. Next, in step 2550, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes an effect operation content determination process, which will be described later. Next, in step 3912, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the symbol content determination flag, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 4000). Even in the case of No in step 3902, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 4000).

  Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of effect operation content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2550 in FIG. First, in step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the currently set light amount level temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S. Next, in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the referenced light amount level is “high”. In the case of Yes in step 2554, in step 2556, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the effect operation content determination lottery table (effect table 0) based on the decorative symbol variation mode and the sub-side game state type. The pattern is determined by lottery, and the determined effect pattern is set in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and the process proceeds to Step 2564. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2554, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the referenced light amount level is “medium”. In the case of Yes in step 2558, in step 2560, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the effect operation content determination lottery table (effect table 1) based on the decoration pattern variation mode and the sub-side game state type. The pattern is determined by lottery, and the determined effect pattern is set in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and the process proceeds to Step 2564. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2558, in other words, when the light amount level is “small”, in step 2562, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S produces an effect based on the decoration pattern variation mode and the sub-side game state type. The effect pattern is determined by lottery with reference to the operation content determination lottery table (effect table 2), the determined effect pattern is set in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and the process proceeds to step 2564.

  Here, FIG. 57 (production tables 0, 1, and 2) is an example of a lottery table for determining the production operation contents. In the following description, the case where the decoration pattern variation mode is “super reach” is illustrated, but the same applies to the variation patterns of other decoration patterns. First, as shown in this example, the production pattern in the present embodiment is a content of execution related to production operations such as production image reproduction timing, movable object driving timing, lighting lamp lighting / flashing timing, etc. It is specified as Then, based on the effect pattern determined based on the random value acquired at an arbitrary timing, the specified effect operation is executed. For example, when the decoration pattern variation mode is “super reach” and the acquired random number value is “100”, the effect pattern “effect A-5” is determined. Then, based on the effect pattern “effect A-5”, the “effect image A-5” (for example, a series of moving images for enhancing the interest of the decoration symbol variation, at the start of the variation of the decorative symbol, the so-called reach effect. Image can be displayed), and after 30 seconds from the start of the decorative symbol variation, the operation of the “electric decoration lamp (in this example, the game effect lamp D26)” is started. After 55 seconds, the operation of “movable body accessory (in this example, movable body accessory YK)” is started. Here, each effect pattern in the present embodiment can be classified mainly into three types based on the design intention of the effect pattern (hereinafter, such a classification is referred to as an effect system).

  First, the first type is “production system A (or referred to as base production)”, and the production patterns classified into this type are the main production patterns in pachinko gaming machines. Here, the main production pattern means a production pattern that influences the interest related to the production of the pachinko machine. An example in which both are configured to be high (in other words, the production pattern is the main route to the big hit) can be given. In designing such a production pattern, in general, in order to pursue the enhancement of interest related to the production, in general, the movable body accessory drive timing, the illumination lamp lighting / flashing timing, or the disturbance assigned to the production pattern It takes a lot of time to design the numerical range.

  Next, the second type is “production system B (or an actor-based production)”, and the production pattern classified into the type is an production pattern that informs the player that the degree of expectation for jackpot is high. It becomes. In addition, because it is designed to notify that the degree of expectation of jackpot is high, it is designed so that the movable body accessory driving timing and the illumination lamp lighting / flashing timing are relatively increased compared to other classifications. It will be. Since the big hit expectation degree is designed to be high, the selection rate at the time of losing is extremely low, and the selection rate at the time of hitting may be high.

  Next, the third type is “production system C (or an electrical decoration-based production)”, and the production patterns classified into this type are production patterns that serve as a compendium for production systems A and B. . In addition, since it is designed with the intention of assisting the production systems A and B, compared to the production systems A and B, the movable body accessory driving timing and the illumination lamp lighting / flashing timing are relatively reduced. Will be designed. In addition, regarding the big hit expectation degree, there is a case where the selectivity at the time of loss is high and the selectivity at the time of hit is extremely low.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the “production systems A to C”, a “production system D” is further provided. When the light amount level is “medium” or “small”, an effect pattern classified into the “effect system D” can be selected, and is classified into the “effect system D”. The production pattern is the production pattern with the least power consumption.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart of FIG. 56, next, in step 2564, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, based on the determined effect pattern, the effect image reproduction timing, the movable body accessory operation timing, the illumination lamp lighting / Flashing operation timing (in this example, only the three types of timing are illustrated, but not limited to this, for example, audio playback timing, so-called sub input button pressing timing, etc.) may be included, and Execution content (if it is an effect image, for example, the image reproduction content of “effect image A-5”) is temporarily stored (set) in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3912). To do.

  Next, FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 4000 in FIG. First, in step 4002, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4002, in step 4004, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the symbol content determination flag. Next, in step 4006, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the symbol changing flag. Next, in step 4009, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts the drawing variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 4010. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 4002, the process proceeds to step 4010.

  Next, in step 4010, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 4010, in step 4011, the CPUSC of the sub control board S confirms the timer value of the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 4012, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the decorative symbol variation start timing has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 4012, in step 4014, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a decorative symbol variation display command (transmitted to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). , Step 4026 is entered.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4012, in step 4016, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the decorative symbol stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 4016, in step 4018, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the stop display command (temporary stop display command) of the decorative symbol (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the sub sub control unit SS side) The process proceeds to step 4026.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4016, in step 4020, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub control board S has reached the notice image or reach image display timing based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 4020, in step 4022, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets an image display command related to the timing (transmitted to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). Then, the process proceeds to step 4026. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 4020, the process proceeds to step 4026.

  Next, in step 4026, the CPUSC of the sub control board S operates the sub input button SB or the lever SB-3 while the change is a button effect execution change. A symbol variation in which an effect (button effect) that allows a notice effect to be executed based on the performance is called “button effect execution variation”, and a part of the symbol variation with a variation time of 60 seconds related to the main game symbol. It is determined whether or not is a button effect execution variation}. Although details will be described later, the button effects according to the present embodiment include a single push button effect, a continuous hit button effect, a long press button effect, and a hidden button effect. In the case of Yes in step 4026, in step 2650, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a button effect execution process described later, and proceeds to step 4028. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 4026, the process proceeds to step 4028. Next, in step 4028, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the operation timing of the movable body accessory YK has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 4028, in step 4030, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts driving the movable body accessory YK based on the predetermined operation content, and proceeds to step 4032. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 4028, the process proceeds to step 4032. Next, in step 4032, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the operation timing of the illumination lamp has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 4032, in step 4034, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the effect lighting operation permission flag (the flag used in the electric lamp operation control process in FIG. 68), and proceeds to step 4036. To do. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 4032, the process proceeds to step 4036.

  Next, in step 4036, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the main game symbol has stopped. In the case of Yes in step 4036, in step 4038, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the stop display command (decision display command) of the decorative design (transmits to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). To do). Next, in step 4040, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops and resets (zero clears) the drawing variation time timer. Next, in step 4042, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the effect operation execution flag. Next, in step 4044, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the symbol changing flag. Next, in step 4046, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not there is a hold. In the case of Yes in step 4046, in step 4048, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts by resetting (zero clearing) the non-game period measurement timer HY10t (increment timer), and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2900). To do. It should be noted that the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2900) also in the case of No in step 4010, step 4036 or step 4046. As described above, the present embodiment is configured to determine that the non-game period has started when the main game symbol is stopped and there is no hold.

  Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart of button effect execution processing according to the subroutine of step 2650 in FIG. First, in step 2652, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the effect executed by the symbol variation is a button single press effect or a lever effect. In the case of Yes in step 2652, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a single shot effect execution process described later in step 4300, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 4028). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2652, in step 2654, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the effect executed by the change is a button stroke effect. In the case of Yes in step 2654, in step 2750, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a continuous hit effect execution process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 4028).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2654, in step 2656, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the effect executed by the change is a button long press effect. In the case of Yes in step 2656, in step 2800, a long press effect execution process described later is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 4028). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2656, in step 2658, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the effect executed by the change is a hidden button effect. In the case of Yes in step 2658, in step 2850, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a hidden button effect execution process to be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 4028). Also in the case of No in step 2658, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 4028).

  Next, FIG. 60 shows a single press effect execution process {button single press effect (effect that presses the sub input button SB once) and lever effect (effect that pulls the lever once) according to the subroutine of step 4300 in FIG. 59. Is executed when the above is executed. }. Note that when the single button press effect is executed, the processing except for the parentheses is executed (for example, it is determined whether or not the button is valid in step 4302). (For example, it is determined in step 4302 whether or not the lever is valid). First, in step 4302, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is a button effective period (or lever effective period). In the case of Yes in step 4302, in step 4304, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays a single button image (or lever image). Next, in step 4306, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the automatic button flag is off. If Yes in step 4306, in step 4308, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub input button SB (or lever SB-3) has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 4308, in step 4310, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S deletes the displayed single button image (or lever image) and executes the cut-in effect to perform the next process (step 4028). The process proceeds to (1). Note that the cut-in effect (cut-in image) is an effect that suggests a big hit expectation degree of a running symbol variation that is displayed for a short time, and is displayed on the front layer rather than a decorative symbol display (see FIG. 65). ). Also, there are multiple types of cut-in effects, and the jackpot expectation varies depending on the type (for example, the background color is “red” → the jackpot expectation degree is “large”, the background color is “yellow” → the jackpot expectation degree is “medium” The background color is “blue” → the expectation level for big hit is “small”, etc.).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4308, in step 4312, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the button effective period (or lever effective period) has ended. In the case of Yes in step 4312, in step 4314, the CPUSC of the sub control board S erases the displayed single button image (or lever image), and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 4028).

  If NO in step 4306, in step 4316, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub input button SB (or lever SB-3) has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 4316, in step 4318, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the automatic button flag. Next, in step 4320, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S deletes the displayed single button image (or lever image) and executes a cut-in effect to perform the next processing (processing in step 4028). Transition. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4316, in step 4322, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the single button valid period has expired. In the case of Yes in step 4322, in step 4324, the CPUSC of the sub control board S deletes the displayed single button image (or lever image) and executes the cut-in effect, and performs the next process (step 4028). The process proceeds to (1). In addition, also when it is No in step 4302, step 4312, or step 4322, it transfers to the next process (process of step 4028). Thus, when the automatic button flag is on, the cut-in effect is executed at the timing when the button effective period ends, that is, the sub input button SB is operated at the timing when the button effective period ends. The same processing is performed (also referred to as an automatic button operation being executed). Note that the automatic button operation execution timing in the single button press effect is not limited to this. For example, when the button effective period is 5 seconds, the automatic button operation execution timing is 3 seconds after the start of the effective period. You may comprise.

  Next, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the continuous hit effect execution process according to the subroutine of step 2750 in FIG. First, in step 2752, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is a button valid period. In the case of Yes in step 2752, in step 2754, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays a continuous hitting button image (an image for prompting the player to hit the sub input button repeatedly). Next, in step 2756, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the automatic button flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2756, in step 2758, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub input button SB has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 2758, in step 2760, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is an effect that is executed by repeatedly operating the button input stroke (the sub input button SB is operated repeatedly, for example, every time the sub input button SB is operated. Effect is generated), and the process proceeds to step 2762. On the other hand, also in the case of No in 2758, the process proceeds to step 2762.

  Next, in step 2762, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a button repeated effect has been executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) in the button effective period. In the case of Yes in step 2762, in step 2764, the CPUSC of the sub control board S deletes the displayed continuous hit button image and executes the cut-in effect, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 4028). . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2762, in step 2766, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the button valid period has expired. In the case of Yes in step 2766, in step 2768, the CPUSC of the sub control board S erases the displayed continuous hit button image, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 4028).

  If No in step 2756, that is, if the automatic button flag is on, in step 2770, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub input button SB has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 2770, in step 2772, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the automatic button flag. Next, in step 2774, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a button hitting effect, and the process proceeds to step 2780. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2770, in step 2776, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this example) has elapsed since the start of the button effective period. In the case of Yes in step 2776, in step 2778, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a button stroke effect every predetermined time (0.1 seconds in this example) (when the automatic button flag is on). From the timing at which 0.5 second has elapsed since the button effective period started, the button continuous striking effect is executed once every 0.1 second), and the process proceeds to step 2780. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the automatic button flag is on, the button continuous striking effect (button continuous striking that does not require the player to operate the sub input button 0.5 seconds after the start of the button effective period). Production) is executed at intervals of 0.1 seconds. In addition, the situation in which the automatic button flag is on and the button is valid (or the automatic button flag is on and the button is valid, and the player does not operate the sub input button SB). When the player operates the sub-input button SB in a situation where the button-striking effect is executed on the screen, the automatic button flag is turned off, and the player operates the sub-input button SB for subsequent button-striking effects. Will be executed.

  Next, in step 2780, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) of button striking effects have been executed in the button effective period. In the case of Yes in step 2780, in step 2782, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S deletes the displayed continuous hit button image and executes a cut-in effect, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 4028). . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2780, in step 2784, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the button valid period has expired. In the case of Yes in step 2784, in step 2786, the CPUSC of the sub control board S erases the displayed continuous hit button image without executing the cut-in effect, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 4028). . It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2752, step 2776, step 2784, or step 2766, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 4028). In this example, as an effect mode of the button repeated effect, the cut-in effect is displayed when the sub input button SB is operated a predetermined number of times during the button effective period. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a meter is displayed as a continuous hit button image, and every time the sub input button SB is operated during the button effective period, the lighting display of the meter increases as a button continuous hit effect. When the input button SB is operated, the meter lighting display may become full, and then a cut-in effect may be displayed (a so-called progressive button repeated effect). In addition, it may be configured to display how much the current meter lighting display has increased when the sub-input button SB is operated a predetermined number of times during the button effective period without executing the cut-in effect. . In the case of such a configuration, it may be configured such that the greater the lighting display of the meter, the higher the expected degree of jackpot for the symbol variation.

  Next, FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the long press effect execution process according to the subroutine of step 2800 in FIG. In step 2802, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is the button effective period. If Yes in step 2802, in step 2804, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays a long press button image (an image that prompts the player to press the sub input button for a long time). Next, in step 2806, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the automatic button flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2806, in step 2808, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub input button SB is operated. In the case of Yes in step 2808, in step 2810, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is a button long press effect (the effect executed by long pressing the sub input button SB, for example, pressing the sub input button SB. The effect is generated during the operation), and the process proceeds to step 2812. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2808, the process proceeds to step 2812.

  Next, in step 2812, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a button long press effect for a predetermined time has been executed in the button effective period. In the case of Yes in step 2812, in step 2814, the CPUSC of the sub control board S erases the displayed long press button image and executes the cut-in effect, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 4028). To do. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2812, in step 2816, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the button valid period has expired. In the case of Yes in step 2816, in step 2818, the CPUSC of the sub control board S erases the displayed long press button image, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 4028).

  If NO in step 2806, in step 2820, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub input button SB is operated. If Yes in step 2820, in step 2822, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the automatic button flag. Next, in step 2824, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a button long press effect, and the process proceeds to step 2830. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2820, in step 2826, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this example) has elapsed since the start of the button effective period. In the case of Yes in step 2826, in step 2828, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a button long press effect (if the automatic button flag is on, from the timing when 0.5 second has elapsed from the start of the button effective period, The button long press effect is executed), and the process proceeds to step 2830.

  Next, in step 2830, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a button long press effect for a predetermined time has been executed in the button effective period. In the case of Yes in step 2830, in step 2832, the CPUSC of the sub control board S deletes the displayed long press button image and executes the cut-in effect, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 4028). To do. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2830, in step 2834, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the button valid period has expired. In the case of Yes in step 2834, in step 2836, the CPUSC of the sub control board S erases the displayed long press button image without executing the cut-in effect, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 4028). To do. It should be noted that if the result of step 2802, step 2826, step 2834, or step 2816 is No, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 4028). In this example, as an effect mode of the button long press effect, the cut-in effect is displayed when the operation of the sub input button SB is maintained for a predetermined time in the button effective period. Is not limited, for example, the meter is displayed as a long press button image, the operation of the sub input button SB is maintained during the button effective period, and the meter lighting display as the button long press effect every time the maintenance time elapses When the sub input button SB is pressed for a predetermined time during the button effective period, the meter lighting display is full, and then the cut-in effect is displayed ( The so-called progressive button press effect). In addition, it may be configured to display how much the current meter lighting display has increased when the sub input button SB is pressed for a predetermined time during the button effective period without executing the cut-in effect. Good. In the case of such a configuration, it may be configured such that the greater the lighting display of the meter, the higher the expected degree of jackpot for the symbol variation.

  Next, FIG. 63 is an execution image diagram of the automatic button operation in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. First, the upper part of the figure shows the timing at which an automatic button operation can be executed when a single button press effect is executed (in this example, the case where the variation time is 60 seconds is illustrated). Specifically, the button valid period and button automatic input in the case of a 60 second symbol change (the automatic button flag is on, so that a cut-in effect, a button repeated effect, etc. are executed without operating the sub input button SB). This is sometimes referred to as button automatic input). When the button single press effect is executed, the button automatic input is executed at the timing when the button effective period ends. The timing at which the button automatic input is executed is not limited to this. For example, the button automatic input may be executed at a timing in the middle of the button effective period.

  Next, the lower part of FIG. 63 is an operation diagram showing the timing at which button automatic input can be executed in the case of a button continuous striking effect or a button long press effect. In the case of a button repeated effect or a long button press effect, the button automatic input is executed every 0.1 seconds from the timing 0.5 seconds after the button effective period starts. . By configuring in this way, the button automatic stroke effect or the button long press effect is earlier than the button single press effect, and the execution timing of the button automatic input for the button effective period is earlier, and the pattern variation period The button validity period is configured to be delayed. In this example, the timing at which the button automatic input is executed by the symbol variation in which the button repeated effect and the button long press effect are executed is 0.5 seconds after the button effective period starts. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the button long press effect is executed, the big hit expectation is higher than when the button hit effect is executed, and the button automatic input related to the button hit effect is performed. The timing may be 0.5 seconds after the button effective period starts, and the button automatic input timing related to the button long press effect may be the timing when the button effective period starts. Moreover, you may comprise so that the button effective period with respect to the period of symbol fluctuation may become late | slow in the button effective period which concerns on the button long press effect rather than the button effective period which concerns on a button repeated striking effect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the big hit expectation degree of the symbol variation in which the button repeated effect or the long button press effect is executed is higher than the big hit expectation degree in the symbol variation in which the single button press effect is executed. Has been. In other words, a button hitting effect with a high jackpot expectation or a long button press effect has a slower button effective period with respect to the symbol variation period than a button single press effect with a low jackpot expectation, and the button is automatically activated during the button effective period. The input execution timing will be accelerated.

  Also, even if the same button single press effect, depending on the level of expectation of jackpot, automatic input timing (the same effect as when the sub input button SB is operated without operating the sub input button SB = cut-in effect) The timing at which is executed may be different. More specifically, after the start of reach than when the speech advance notice (notice effect with relatively low jackpot expectation) is executed by single-pressing the sub input button SB in the button effective period before the start of reach. When the cut-in effect (notice effect with a relatively high expectation of big hits) is executed by single-pressing the sub input button SB during the button effective period, the automatic input timing is the timing after the button effective period. (It may be the previous timing, or the automatic input timing in the button effective period may be different due to the difference in expectation of jackpot). Further, such a configuration may be applied not only to a single button press effect, but also to a button hit effect, a button long press effect, a lever effect, and a hidden button effect. In addition, even if the same button single press effect, the earlier the button effective period start timing, the later the automatic input timing in the button effective period will be later (the previous timing may be different, and the button effective period start timing is different. Depending on the automatic input timing in the button effective period. Further, such a configuration may be applied not only to a single button press effect, but also to a button hit effect, a button long press effect, a lever effect, and a hidden button effect.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart of the hidden button effect execution process according to the subroutine of step 2850 in FIG. First, in step 2852, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S operates the sub-input button SB with a button variation period (a single button press effect, a button continuous press effect, a button long press effect, or a hidden button effect). It is determined whether or not the period during which the effect is received = the period in which the effect is executed by operating the sub input button SB). If Yes in step 2852, in step 2854, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub input button SB has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 2854, in step 2856, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a button hitting effect. Next, in step 2858, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays a continuous hit button image, and proceeds to step 2860. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2854, the process proceeds to step 2860. As described above, when the hidden button effect is executed, an image for prompting the player to repeatedly press the sub input button SB is not displayed. However, when the player operates the sub input button SB during the button effective period, the continuous hit button image is displayed. At the same time, the button stroke effect is executed. More specifically, when the player operates the sub input button SB during the button effective period, a meter is displayed as a continuous hit button image, and an effect in which the number of lit meters increases as a button continuous hit effect is executed. The Rukoto.

  Next, in step 2860, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the continuous hit button image is displayed. In the case of Yes in step 2860, in step 2862, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) of button striking effects have been executed in the button effective period. In the case of Yes in step 2862, in step 2864, the CPUSC of the sub control board S deletes the displayed continuous hit button image and displays a lever image. Next, in step 2866, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the lever effective flag, and proceeds to the processing of step 2872.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2860 or step 2862, in step 2868, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the button valid period has ended. In the case of Yes in step 2868, in step 2870, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the displayed continuous hit button image (if the continuous hit button image is not displayed, the processing is not executed), and step 2872 Migrate to Note that if the answer is No in Step 2852 or Step 2868, the process proceeds to Step 2872.

  Next, in step 2872, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the lever effective flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2872, in step 2874, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the lever SB-3 has been operated during the lever effective period. In the case of Yes in step 2874, in step 2876, the CPUSC of the sub control board S erases the displayed lever image and executes the cut-in effect, and the process proceeds to step 2880. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2874, in step 2878, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the lever effective period has ended. If Yes in step 2878, the process proceeds to step 2880. Next, in step 2880, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the lever effective flag, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 4028). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2872 or step 2878, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 4028). In the present embodiment, the automatic button flag is not turned on / off even if the sub input button SB is operated during the symbol variation for executing the hidden button effect. With this configuration, for example, in a situation where the automatic button flag is on, when the player operates the sub input button SB to make the meter appear as a hidden button effect, the automatic button flag is turned off. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event different from the player's intention. Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, in the symbol variation for executing the hidden button effect, even if the automatic button flag is on, the automatic button operation is not executed, that is, the player himself Unless the sub input button SB is operated, the display of the repeated hit button image and the repeated button hit effect are not executed.

Next, FIG. 65 is an example of a hidden button effect image diagram in the gaming machine according to the present example. First, a super reach effect is started in a certain symbol variation, and a button image effect display is not performed. Next, when the sub-input button SB is pressed in a state where the button image is not displayed, a button prompting operation (displayed by a meter) as a hidden button effect and a prompt for prompting the player to perform the hitting operation (in this example) Is displayed. ”Is displayed. Next, the sub input button SB is continuously operated, and the meter becomes full when the sub input button SB is pressed a predetermined number of times. Next, when the sub input button SB is pressed a predetermined number of times, the display of the meter is erased, a lever image is displayed, and a display that prompts the player to operate the lever (in this example, “pull the lever !!”). Display) is displayed. Thereafter, by operating the lever SB-3, a cut-in image is displayed on the effect display device SG, and the big hit symbol is stopped as the decorative symbol stop symbol. As described above, even when the automatic button flag is turned on at the time of executing the hidden button effect, the automatic button input is not executed, that is, unless the player operates the sub input button SB repeatedly, the meter, the lever image The cut-in effect will not be displayed. Note that the execution mode of the hidden button effect is not limited to the mode shown in FIG.
(1) In a situation where reach production is started and the button image is not displayed, a meter is displayed by operating the sub input button SB repeatedly.
(2) After that, when the sub input button SB is operated repeatedly and the lighting display of the meter becomes full, the display “Lever production is being prepared” is displayed large (in a size that occupies more than half of the display area SG10). Display),
(3) After that, the indication “in preparation for lever production” becomes smaller and moves to the lower right of the display area SG10.
(4) Later, at the end of the reach production, a single branch button or lever operation is performed as a branching branch effect {an effect that suggests the big hit expectation of the symbol variation being executed. ”Please let me!” Display, cut-in effect, single button push or lever single pull, specific symbols that are not numbers are aligned, button single push or lever single pull is stopped ( Temporarily stop) (or do not complete) etc.} is executed.
(5) When the lever operation is urged in the winning / branching effect, “Lever is being prepared” is displayed again large, and then “Lever is being prepared” is deleted and the lever image is displayed. (When executing the winning branch effect, it is preferable that the expectation degree of jackpot of the symbol variation being executed is higher when the lever image is displayed than when the button image is displayed. When the button image is displayed, the operation of the sub input button SB is prompted, and when the lever image is displayed, the operation of the lever SB-3 is prompted).
(6) The winning and branching effect is an effect of operating the lever SB-3, and when the cut-in effect is executed by operating the lever SB-3, the big hit expectation degree among the plurality of cut-in effects If the cut-in effect with the lowest is not executed, or if the cut-in effect with the lowest expectation level of the big hit is executed among the plurality of cut-in effects, it is definite that the symbol variation being executed is a big hit You may comprise.
(7) Note that there are a plurality of types (for example, a plurality of display colors) of button images (and lever images) in the winning / branching effect (the expected degree of jackpot varies depending on the type of button image), and the button effective period (and When the indicator display suggesting the lever effective period) is displayed, the indicator display also corresponds to the type of the button image (and the lever image) {for example, the button display is “blue”, “red”, “ Expectation of big hits of the symbol variation being executed in the order of “leopard pattern” and “rainbow” (“rainbow” is a big hit decision), and the color of the indicator (indicating the button effective period or lever effective period) "Blue", "Red", "Leopard pattern", "Rainbow" may be used according to the button display color}. The indicator has a “bar” shape in which the display portion becomes shorter as the button effective period (or lever effective period) elapses, and the display portion of the “bar” is the button effective period (or The remaining time of the lever effective period) is suggested. In addition, the effect immediately before the appearance of the button image (and the lever image) (the effect of the appearance of the button when the light gathers) is what color {"blue", "red", "leather pattern", "rainbow" Expectation and execution related to which type of button image (and lever image) is displayed depending on whether the big hit expectation degree of the symbol variation being executed becomes higher ("rainbow" is the big hit decision)} The big hit expectation degree of the inside symbol fluctuation is different.
You may comprise as mentioned above.

  Next, FIG. 66 is a flowchart of the special game related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2900 in FIG. First, in step 2902, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the special gaming flag is OFF. In the case of Yes in step 2902, in step 2904, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2904, in step 2912, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the special gaming flag. Next, in step 2914, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sends a command related to the big hit start display on the effect display device SG (transmitted to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). Set (appropriately based on the type of jackpot). Next, in step 2915, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the special gaming effect mode in the sub-side gaming state type, and proceeds to step 2916. Note that if the result in Step 2902 is No, the process proceeds to Step 2916. Next, in step 2916, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for sequentially displaying the number of rounds and the number of winning prizes (transmitted to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). To do.

  Next, in step 2926, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command is received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2926, in step 2928, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command relating to the jackpot end display (sent to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). . Next, in step 2930, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the special gaming flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 4400). Note that if the answer is No in Step 2904 or Step 2926, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in Step 4400).

  Next, FIG. 67 is a flowchart of background image display processing according to the subroutine of step 4400 in FIG. First, in step 4402, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state has shifted from the non-time-reduced gaming state to the time-reduced gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 4402, in step 4404, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the time reduction effect mode as the sub game state type. Next, in step 4406, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the background image for the time-shortening effect mode on the effect display device SG, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 4500). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4402, in step 4408, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state has shifted from the time-reduced gaming state to the non-time-reduced gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 4408, in step 4410, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the normal effect mode as the sub game state type. Next, in step 4412, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the background image for the normal effect mode on the effect display device SG, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 4500). In addition, also when it is No at step 4408, it transfers to the next process (process of step 4500).

  Next, FIG. 68 is a flowchart of the illumination lamp operation control process according to the subroutine of step 4500 in FIG. In step 4502, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an error leaving instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 4502, in step 4504, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S acquires the type of error that occurred (in this example, door open error, pan full error, vibration detection error, or illegal radio wave detection error). To do. Next, in step 4510, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the lighting pattern and the lighting luminance based on the error type and the current light amount level (in this example, large / medium / small) (lighting table 1). The determined content is temporarily stored (set) in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. Next, in step 4512, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the error lighting operation flag, and proceeds to step 4514. Note that if the result is No in step 4502, the process proceeds to step 4514.

  Next, in step 4514, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the error lighting operation in progress flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4514, the CPUSC of the sub control board S in step 4516, based on the lighting pattern and lighting brightness temporarily stored (set) in the RAM area of the sub control board S, for example, a predetermined illumination lamp (for example, Then, a lighting operation of a predetermined part of the game effect lamp D26 is executed. Next, in step 4518, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an error neglect cancellation command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 4518, in step 4520, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the error lighting operation in-progress flag, and proceeds to step 4522. Note that if the answer is No in Step 4514 or Step 4518, the process proceeds to Step 4522.

  Next, in step 4522, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the error lighting operation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 4522, in step 4524, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the lighting operation permission flag for effect is on. In the case of Yes in step 4524, in step 4526, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the lighting operation permission flag for effect. Next, in step 4528, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the lighting pattern and the lighting brightness based on the production system and the current light amount level (see the lighting table 2), and the RAM area of the sub control board S. Temporarily store (set). Next, in step 4530, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the effect lighting operation flag, and proceeds to step 4532. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 4524, the process proceeds to step 4532.

  Next, in step 4532, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the effect lighting operation flag is on. If Yes in step 4532, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on a predetermined lighting lamp lighting operation based on the lighting pattern and lighting brightness temporarily stored (set) in the RAM area of the sub control board S in step 4534. Execute. Next, in step 4536, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not all scheduled lighting operations have been completed. In the case of Yes in step 4536, in step 4538, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the effect lighting operation flag, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 3250).

  If NO in step 4532, in step 4540, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the effect operation execution flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 4540, in step 4542, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the lighting pattern and the lighting brightness based on the current sub-side gaming state type and light amount level (see the lighting table 3). The determined contents are temporarily stored (set) in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. Next, in 4544, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a predetermined lighting lamp lighting operation based on the lighting pattern and the lighting brightness temporarily stored (set) in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. The process proceeds to (the process of step 3250). In addition, also when it is No in step 4522, step 4536, or step 4540, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3250).

  Next, FIG. 69 is an example of a reference table for determining an illumination lamp lighting pattern according to this example. First, the illumination table 1 is an illumination table that is referred to when an error occurs. As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the lighting pattern of the illumination lamp is configured so that the lighting period → the extinguishing period is one cycle, and the one cycle is repeated a predetermined number of times (including the case where the number of times is not limited). Yes. Further, the brightness of the illumination lamp during the lighting period is determined based on any one of a predetermined number of stages (in this example, 10 stages) (in this example, the brightness of the illumination lamp is brightness 1 < The luminance is increased in the order of 2 <... << brightness 10). In addition, the lighting pattern and brightness | luminance of the said illumination lamp are comprised so that it may differ for every kind of error, and the present light quantity level. In this example, the lighting brightness (and lighting pattern) of the illumination lamp can be different depending on the set light level even when an error occurs. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is set when an error occurs. The illumination lamp may be lit at a constant lighting brightness (and lighting pattern) at all times regardless of the light amount level.

  Next, the illumination table 2 is an illumination table that is referred to during the production operation. As shown in this example, the configuration related to the lighting pattern and brightness of the electrical lamp is the same as the configuration in the electrical table 1. Moreover, the lighting pattern and brightness | luminance of the said electrical decoration lamp are comprised so that it may differ for every production system and the present light quantity level.

  Next, the illumination table 3 is an illumination table that is referred to when the gaming state is notified. As shown in this example, the configuration related to the lighting pattern and brightness of the electrical lamp is the same as the configuration in the electrical table 1. Moreover, the lighting pattern and brightness | luminance of the said illumination lamp are comprised so that it may differ for every sub side game state classification and the present light quantity level.

  In the present embodiment, the lighting pattern and lighting brightness of the electric lamp can be different due to the difference in the light amount level, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the light amount level is different. The lighting pattern of the illumination lamp is not different, and only the illumination brightness of the illumination lamp may be different. Further, in the present embodiment, the lighting pattern of the illumination lamp and the lighting luminance at the time of error occurrence can be different due to the difference in the light amount level, but the present invention is not limited to this. May be configured to determine the lighting pattern and lighting brightness of the illumination lamp based only on the type of error that occurred regardless of the light level, or when an error occurs regardless of the type of error that occurred The lighting pattern of the electric lamp may always be a predetermined pattern, and the lighting luminance of the electric lamp may be a predetermined luminance.

  Next, FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the volume control processing according to the subroutine of step 3250 in FIG. First, in step 3252, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the sound volume determination timing (for example, at the start of big hit, at the start of fluctuation, at the start of the standby demonstration screen, at the time of determining the volume switch change, or at the time of determining the volume level change). ). In the case of Yes in step 3252, in step 3254, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an error notification instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 3254, in step 3256, the CPUSC of the sub control board S acquires the type of error that has occurred. Next, in step 3258, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the volume based on the type of error and the volume switch status (refer to the error volume determination table), and the determined contents are stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S. Is temporarily stored (set), and the process proceeds to step 3262.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3254, in step 3260, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the output volume based on the volume switch status and the determined volume level (see the non-error volume determination table). The determined contents are temporarily stored (set) in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and the process proceeds to Step 3262. Note that if the result is No in step 3252, the process proceeds to step 3262. Next, in step 3262, the CPUSC of the sub control board S outputs a sound based on the determined (set) volume, and proceeds to the next processing (step 2999).

  Next, FIG. 71 (non-error volume determination table) is an example of a table for determining the volume output from the gaming machine in the non-error state in the gaming machine according to this example. The volume level according to the present example is set to five levels of level 1 to level 5, and is configured to be set by the player determining the volume level. Further, the volume switch is set in three levels, large, medium, and small, and is configured so that only the administrator can set it (for example, it cannot be changed without opening the door D18). In this example, the maximum volume (dB) output from the gaming machine is determined by the volume level and the volume switch. For example, when the volume level is set to “level 3” and the volume switch is set to “medium”, the maximum output volume dB is “95 dB”. When the volume switch is “low” and the volume level is “level 1” or “level 2”, or in the demo screen mode, the volume is fixed at “1” which is the minimum volume value. The In addition, the volume corresponding to the volume level is the same when the volume switch is “high” and when the volume switch is “medium” (the volume is the same when the volume level is the same). ) With this configuration, since the volume varies depending on the type of sound to be output, the maximum value of the volume is the same, and only the minimum value of the volume (volume level 1 and volume level 2 when the volume switch is “low”) ) Can be adjusted so that the volume level does not vary for each product number.

  Next, FIG. 71 (error volume determination table) is an example of a table for determining the volume output from the gaming machine at the time of error in the gaming machine according to the present example. Note that the volume at the time of error is configured so that the player cannot be set (it is determined regardless of the volume level), and only the administrator can be set with the volume switch. Note that the horizontal axis shows error modes (in this example, a door opening error, a pan full error, a vibration detection error, and an illegal radio wave detection error are illustrated). The maximum volume (dB) output from the gaming machine is determined by the volume switch on the vertical axis. For example, when the error type is “vibration detection error” and the volume switch is set to “small”, the maximum output volume dB is “78 dB”. The unauthorized radio wave detection error is a high-risk error, and is always fixed at “95 dB” which is the maximum volume regardless of the volume level setting as well as the volume switch setting. With this configuration, the volume level for notifying an error of the gaming machine cannot be customized by the player, and the maximum volume is always set for illegal radio wave detection errors, which are particularly high-risk errors. It is configured to be output at. In the present embodiment, the volume at the time of error occurrence is determined based on the type of error that occurred and the status of the volume switch. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and regardless of the status of the volume switch. However, it may be configured to differ only depending on the type of error that has occurred, or may be configured to always have the maximum volume when an error occurs, regardless of the type of error that has occurred and the status of the volume switch.

  With the configuration as described above, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the player operates the operation member without operating the operation members (sub-input button SB, cross key SB-2, lever SB-3). It is configured so that the same effects as those performed are performed (automatic button input is performed), and the settings relating to the volume, the settings relating to the light quantity, and the automatic button operation settings can be changed. In addition, as a change mode of the setting relating to the light amount and the automatic button operation setting, an element that can be changed by the player and an element that can be changed only by the administrator are provided, and a changeable situation or an unchangeable situation (button effect) Medium) and different ways of changing (non-gaming and in-game), allowing users to customize gaming machines according to the player's preferences without sacrificing gaming, and is user-friendly and interesting It can be a high gaming machine.

(Modification 1 from this embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, at the time of executing the button effect, it is possible to execute an automatic button setting in which the same effect as when the player operates the operation member without operating the operation member is executed. However, the operation mode of the operation member according to the button effect is not limited to this. Accordingly, a configuration to which the operation mode of the operation member at the time of executing the button effect different from the present embodiment is applied as a first modification from the present embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 72 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in Modification 1 from the present embodiment. The change from this embodiment is Step 3500 (Modification 1), that is, after executing the volume control processing in Step 3250, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is described later in Step 3500 (Modification 1). Right-handed instruction display control processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2999.

  Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the non-game period control process according to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. 72 in the first modification from the present embodiment. The changes from this embodiment are Step 2166 (Modification 1) and Step 2168 (Modification 1), that is, if no new main game hold has occurred in Step 2156, Step 2166 (Modification 1) The CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a new auxiliary game suspension has occurred. In the case of Yes in Step 2166 (Modification 1), the non-game period measurement timer HY10t is stopped and reset in Step 2168 (Modification 1), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 3600). It should be noted that also in the case of No in Step 2162 (Modification 1), the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 3600). Thus, in the first modification from the present embodiment, when the operation of the launch handle D44 is detected, when the symbol variation starts, when a new main game hold occurs, and when a new auxiliary game hold is made It is determined that the non-game period has ended and the non-game period measurement timer HY10t is reset when the operation of the launch handle D44 is detected at the time of resetting, When the game starts and when a new main game hold occurs, the standby demonstration screen, the first customization guidance screen, the second customization guidance screen, the customization in progress screen, the light intensity adjustment screen, and the volume adjustment screen are displayed. If, on the other hand, an auxiliary game suspension occurs, the standby demonstration screen, the first customization guidance screen, the second customization guidance screen, the customization Execution screen, the display of the light amount adjustment screen and volume control screen is configured so as not to be erased. In the first modification from the present embodiment, the condition for shifting to the standby demonstration screen is that the non-game period measurement timer value is equal to or greater than the demonstration start value (240 seconds). The measurement of the value is started = the non-game period is started when the gaming machine customization setting is changed (determined) and when the symbol variation is stopped and the main game hold does not exist. Yes. The conditions for resetting the non-game period measurement timer value are as follows: symbol variation has started, operation of the launch handle D44 has been detected, main game hold has occurred, or auxiliary game hold has occurred (the auxiliary game start port H10 is The game ball may have passed). In addition, there are two or more conditions for ending the display of the standby demonstration screen among the detection of the operation of the firing handle D44, the start of symbol variation, the occurrence of the main game hold, and the occurrence of the auxiliary game hold shown in FIG. May be used as a condition, and in such a case, it is preferable that the two or more established conditions include the start of symbol variation.

  Next, FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the right-handed instruction display control process according to the subroutine of Step 3500 (Modification 1) in FIG. 72 in Modification 1 from the present embodiment. First, in step 3502, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special game is being executed. If Yes in step 3502, the process proceeds to step 3508. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3502, in step 3504, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 3504, in step 3505, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the non-game period measurement timer value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (5 seconds in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3505, in step 3506, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the operation of the firing handle D44 has not been detected. If Yes in step 3506, the process proceeds to step 3510. Note that the process proceeds to step 3510 also in the case of No in step 3505. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3506, in step 3508, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for displaying the first right-handed instruction display and the second right-handed instruction display, and the next process (process in step 2999). ). In step 3510, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for displaying the first right-handed instruction display, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 2999). Here, the upper right part of the figure is a display image diagram of a right-handed instruction display. As shown in the figure, in the first modification from the present embodiment, it is a game method in which a player hits the player right (the game ball is fired toward the right side of the game board surface. As the display on the effect display device SG that prompts the player to make a right-handed action, the first right-handed instruction display and the second right-handed instruction display are provided. Further, the second right-handed instruction display has a larger display area than the first right-handed instruction display, and is configured to be easily visible (conspicuous) by the player. By configuring in this way, the first right-handed instruction display is displayed when it is desired to emphasize the effects accompanying symbol variation, and when it is disadvantageous to the player when right-handed is not executed, etc. The second right-handed instruction display (or both the first right-handed instruction display and the second right-handed instruction display may be displayed) can be configured to be displayed.

  If NO in step 3504, the CPUSC of the sub control board S erases the first right-handed instruction display and the second right-handed instruction display in step 3512 (for right-handed instruction display that is not displayed). Set a command that does not execute processing. Next, in step 3513, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the non-game period measurement timer value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (5 seconds in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3513, in step 3514, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the operation of the firing handle D44 has been detected. In the case of Yes in step 3514, in step 3516, the CPUSC of the sub control board S produces a predetermined effect (the effect that is executed only when the firing handle D44 is operated, for example, “Fight!” Is displayed). A command to be displayed on the display device SG is set, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2999). In the case of No in step 3513 or step 3514, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2999) without executing the predetermined effect. As described above, in the first modification from the present embodiment, the predetermined time (5 seconds) has elapsed since the non-game state has been entered, the non-time-reduced game state is being executed, and the special game is being executed. If the firing handle D44 is operated in a case that is not, a predetermined effect that can be executed only when the firing handle D44 is operated is configured to be executable. The predetermined time may be longer than 5 seconds (for example, 30 seconds), or the time when the standby demonstration screen starts to be displayed (for example, 240 seconds, and the firing handle D44 is operated during the execution of the standby demonstration). Or a predetermined demonstration can be executed by operating the firing handle D44 after the standby demonstration screen is displayed. May be executed). In addition, when the predetermined time (5 seconds) has elapsed since the non-game state is entered, the time-reduction game state is being executed, and the special handle is not being executed, the launch handle D44 is operated. Both a right-handed instruction display and a second right-handed instruction display are configured to be displayed. Note that there may be a plurality of types of the predetermined effects, and it may be configured to determine which effect is executed by lottery.

  Next, FIG. 75 is a flowchart of a continuous hit effect execution process according to the subroutine of step 2750 in FIG. 59 in the first modification from the present embodiment. First, in step 2788-1, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the current button consecutive hitting effective period (a period in which the repeated hitting effect is displayed by pressing the sub input button SB). In the case of Yes in step 2788-1, a continuous hit button image is displayed in step 2788-2. Next, in step 2788-3, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub input button SB is newly pressed for a long time (the sub input button SB is turned on after the sub input button SB is turned on). It is determined that the button has been pressed for a long time if it continues for 0.5 seconds). In the case of Yes in step 2788-3, in step 2788-4, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the automatic continuous hitting effective flag (if the flag is on and the button continuous hitting effective period is in effect) (Successful rendition effect will be executed) is turned on, and the flow proceeds to Step 2788-5. Note that if the result is No at step 22788-3, the process proceeds to step 2788-5.

  Next, in step 2788-5, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the automatic continuous hitting valid flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2788-5, an automatic continuous effect is executed in step 2788-6, and the process proceeds to step 2788-9. Note that the auto-strike effect is an effect such as an effect that occurs when the player presses the sub input button SB for a long time, and the player presses and holds the sub input button SB. In the case of continuing, one continuous hit effect is continuously executed every 0.2 seconds (effect is generated). It should be noted that the effect mode of the auto-striking effect and the effect mode of the single-shot effect that will be described later are the same effect mode, and may be collectively referred to as a “sequential hit effect”. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2788-5, in step 2788-7, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not there has been a single press operation on the sub input button SB (the sub input button SB is turned off → on). It is determined that there has been a single press operation when the ON state does not continue for 0.5 seconds and then turns OFF again. In the case of Yes in step 2788-7, in step 2788-8, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a single shot effect, and proceeds to step 2788-9. Also in the case of No in step 2788-7, the process proceeds to step 2788-9. The single-shot continuous effect is an effect such as an effect that occurs when the player presses the sub-input button SB, and the player repeatedly presses the sub-input button SB. Each time the push is performed, one continuous hit effect is executed (effect is generated). Next, in step 2788-9, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a predetermined number of repeated hitting effects have been executed in one button hitting effective period. It should be noted that the predetermined number of repeated hits only requires that the total number of the repeated hits executed in the automatic repeated hits and the repeated hits executed in the single shot repeats be a predetermined number. Then it is 10 times. If YES in step 2788-9, the flow advances to step 2790-2. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2788-9, in step 2790-1, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is at the end timing of the button hitting effective period (in this example, 4 seconds after the start timing of the button hitting effective period). It is determined whether it has been reached. If Yes in step 2790-1, the process proceeds to step 2790-2, and if No, the process proceeds to step 2790-7. Next, in step 2790-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays a cut-in effect, and proceeds to step 2790-7.

  If NO in step 2788-1, in step 2790-3, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the current auto-hit acceptance period (continuous hit effects are displayed continuously by pressing and holding the sub-input button SB). It is determined whether or not it is a period. In this example, the automatic repeated hit acceptance period is also provided in a period that is not the button repeated hit effective period in the symbol variation period. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured not to be provided, or it may be configured to always be a button continuous hitting effective period and an automatic continuous hit accepting period in some symbol variations, for example, a non-stochastic variable gaming state and a non-time shortened gaming state In the time variation such as the symbol variation at the time, the symbol variation for a predetermined time or more, the symbol variation for a predetermined time or less, etc., the button continuous hitting effective period and the automatic repeated hit acceptance period may be used. Also, except for some situations, it is possible to always use the button hitting effective period and the automatic hitting acceptance period. For example, during the big hit start demo time, during the big hit end demo time, during the variable fixed time, always during the button hitting effective period And it is good also as an automatic repeated hitting effective period. Further, all the periods in which the sub input button SB is pressed for a long time may be the automatic repeated hit acceptance period (the button repeated hit effective period is a partial period in the symbol variation in which the repeated hit effect is executed). In the case of Yes in step 2790-3, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays a continuous hit button image in step 2790-4. Next, in step 2790-5, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub input button SB is newly pressed for a long time. In the case of Yes in step 2790-5, in step 2790-6, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the automatic continuous hitting valid flag, and proceeds to step 2790-7. It should be noted that the process proceeds to step 2790-7 also in the case of No in step 2790-3 or 2790-5.

  Next, in step 2790-7, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the automatic continuous hitting valid flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2790-7, in step 2790-8, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub input button SB is off (it may be determined whether or not it has been pressed for a long time). . In the case of Yes in step 2790-8, in step 2790-9, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the automatic continuous hitting valid flag and proceeds to the next process (process in step 4028). In addition, also in the case of No in step 2790-7 or step 2790-8, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 4028).

  Here, the lower part of the figure is a button effect execution period image diagram. In the same figure, the symbol fluctuation | variation in which the button repeated impact effect which is a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is performed is illustrated. First, the sub input button SB is disabled for 3 seconds after the symbol variation is started, and the decorative symbol is varied. Thereafter, the automatic repeated hit acceptance period is started at a timing 3 seconds after the start of symbol variation. It should be noted that the button hitting effective period has not yet started at this timing. Thereafter, the first button hitting effective period starts 2 seconds later (the button hitting effective period is provided three times for one symbol variation). As described above, in the first modification from the present embodiment, the automatic repeated hit acceptance period is provided before the start timing of the first button repeated effective period. For example, the first repeated button effective period is started. Even if the long press of the sub input button SB is started one second before the timing, the automatic repeated striking effect is started from the start timing of the first button striking effective period. After that, the first button hitting valid period ends four seconds after the start timing of the first button hitting effective period, but the automatic hitting acceptance period continues. After that, it is no longer the button continuous hitting effective period for 2 seconds from the end timing of the first button hitting effective period, then the second button hitting effective period for 4 seconds, and then the button hitting for 2 seconds from the end timing of the second button hitting effective period. It is configured not to be in the effective period, but to be in the third button repeated effective period for 4 seconds thereafter. In addition, the automatic continuous hit acceptance period continues until the end timing of the third button continuous hit effective period. As described above, in the first modification from the present embodiment, three button hitting effective periods are provided in one symbol variation, and the automatic consecutive hit acceptance period is based on the start timing of the first button hitting effective period. Is also provided continuously from the timing 2 seconds before to the end timing of the third button repeated hitting effective period, that is, a certain button repeated hitting effective period and the next button repeated hitting effective period (for example, the first button repeated hitting effective period A period that is not the button continuous hitting effective period between the period and the second button continuous hitting effective period) is also an automatic repeated hit accepting period. It should be noted that even if the sub input button is pressed for a long time during the symbol variation in which the hidden button effect is executed, the automatic repeated effect is not executed. In this example, it is configured so that the automatic repeated striking effect is executed when the long press of the sub input button SB is started in the automatic repeated striking acceptance period provided before the button repeated striking valid period. The present invention is not limited, and it may be configured such that the automatic repeated striking effect is not executed when the long press of the sub input button SB is started before the button repeated striking effective period.

  With the configuration as described above, in the gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment, when the button effect is executed (when the button repeat effect is executed), the player can repeatedly hit the sub input button for a long time. By configuring the auto-hit function to execute the same effect as when operated, and providing the auto-hit acceptance period before the button-hit valid period, the auto-hit function is turned on. In such a situation, even if the sub-input button is pressed for a long time before the button hitting effective period, the sub input is made before the button hitting effective period. If you press and hold the button, all the repetitive strike effects will be executed, and it is user-friendly in that you do not have to bother to execute the repetitive strike operation It is possible to the gaming machine for rendering on the effect display device upon execution of interest highly button repeated pressing effect, it becomes possible to more attention player.

  In the first modification from the present embodiment, the automatic continuous hit effect is always executed every 0.2 seconds when the automatic continuous hit effect is executed. However, the execution mode of the automatic continuous hit effect is not limited to this. In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the automatic continuous hit effect even in the execution variation of the hidden button effect, the execution interval of the automatic continuous hit effect may be made different when the executed effect is different. Specifically, when executing the hidden button effect, the automatic repeated effect is executed every 0.5 seconds, whereas when executing the button repeated effect, the automatic repeated effect is executed every 0.2 seconds. Also good. In addition, in such a configuration, the start timing of the button repeated hitting effective period in the hidden button effect may be provided after the execution start timing of the reach effect, or the button repeated hitting effective period in the hidden button effect is the button repeated hitting effect. You may comprise so that it may become longer than the button continuous striking effective period. In addition, as the button repeated hitting effect, the button repeated hitting effect A and the button repeated hitting effect B are provided. When the button repeated hitting effect A is executed, the automatic repeated hitting effect is executed every 0.5 seconds, whereas the button repeated hitting effect B is executed. Sometimes, it may be configured to execute an automatic repeated striking effect every 0.2 seconds (the execution interval of the automatic repeated striking effect differs depending on the type of the button repeated striking effect). In addition, when comprised in that way, you may comprise so that the length of an effective period may differ between the button effective period of the button repeated striking effect A, and the button effective period of the button repeated striking effect B. In addition, the button hitting effect A and the button hitting effect B may be configured such that the predetermined number of times in step 2788-9 (the number of times of repeated hitting operation at which the cut-in effect is executed) is different. When configured, the button repeated strike effect A and the button repeated strike effect B may be configured such that the execution interval of the automatic repeated strike effect is different.

  Next, FIG. 76 is an example of display priority applicable to the gaming machine of this example. In the figure, display contents that can be displayed on the effect display device SG are listed. Those with higher display priority are shown in the upper row, and those with lower display priority are shown in the lower row. In addition, when the display content with a high display priority and the display content with a low display priority are displayed in an overlapping manner, specifically, for example, when a right-handed instruction display and a decorative pattern are displayed in an overlapping manner, For the display of the overlapping portion, a right-handed instruction display with a high display priority is displayed on the front side (displayed so as to be visible), and a decorative symbol with a low display priority is displayed on the back side ( It is hidden behind the right-handed instruction display and becomes invisible.) In addition, the display priority in this example is high, so “error display → right-handed instruction display → power saving display → standby demonstration screen → music selection screen display → customizing in progress screen display → customization guidance screen display (automatic button operation setting) Screen) → volume / light quantity adjustment screen display → customization guidance screen display (volume / light quantity) → spec band display → signal → second decorative pattern → decorative pattern → hold display ”. The second decorative symbol means that a normal decorative symbol (referred to as the first decorative symbol) may be hidden in order to show a moving image to the player when super reach or the like is executed. In some cases, the decorative design is displayed at the corner of the display area SG10 so that the player can recognize which decorative design the reach is from a user-friendly viewpoint, and the second decorative design is displayed. The display area of the first decorative design is configured to be larger than the area. The display priority may be changed. For example, “Error display → Right-handed instruction display → Power saving display → Music selection screen display → Customizing screen display → Spec band display → Standby demonstration screen → Customization guidance screen display (Automatic button operation setting screen) → volume / light quantity adjustment screen display → customization guidance screen display (volume / light quantity) → signal → second decoration pattern → hold display → decoration pattern ”. However, regarding the “error display”, “right-handed instruction display”, and “power saving display”, it is not desirable to change the display priority because it greatly affects the player's profit. In addition, regarding “decorative symbols” and “hold display”, the display priority is different between the non-game period (non-game period measurement timer HY10t> 0) and the game (non-game period measurement timer HY10t = 0). For example, in the non-game period, since the display priority is high, it is “decorative symbol → hold display”, whereas in the game, the display priority is high. You may comprise so that it may become "hold display-> decoration design". By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player cannot visually recognize the hold display when the hold display changes as the hold pre-reading effect during the variation of the decorative symbol.

  Next, FIG. 77 is an image diagram of a hidden button effect applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. In the figure, the super reach first half effect and the super reach second half effect are executed in a certain symbol variation. In addition, as a specific example of the execution of the first half of the super reach and the second half of the super reach, the first half of the super reach is performed in the case of a symbol change related to a certain loss, and the lose pattern is temporarily stopped as a result of the first half of the super reach. To do. In such a case, when the lose symbol is stopped as a final stop symbol at the end of the first half of the reach of the super reach, the lose symbol that has been temporarily stopped at the end of the first half of the reach of the super reach is changed again, and the second half of the reach of the super reach is executed. (It may be configured such that the super-reach second half effect is executed without temporarily stopping the lost symbol at the end of the first half of the super reach effect). Note that the expectation of jackpot is higher when the symbol variation ends at the end of the second half of the super reach than when the symbol variation ends at the end of the first half of the super reach. Returning to the explanation of the drawings, first, in the certain symbol variation, the effect of the first half of the super reach is started on the effect display device SG, and the button image is not displayed. Thereafter, when the sub-input button SB is pressed in a state where the button image is not displayed, as a hidden button effect, a button prompting operation (meter) and a prompt for prompting the player to perform a continuous hitting operation (in this example, “Please hit repeatedly!”). Is displayed. Here, the gaming machine in the figure has an automatic continuous hitting function (the same configuration as that of the first modification from the present embodiment), but at the time of executing the hidden button effect shown in the figure, the game Even if the player presses and holds the sub input button SB for a long time, the automatic repeated striking effect is not executed (the player needs to perform the repeated striking operation himself). Thereafter, the player fills the meter when the number of times the sub input button SB is pressed reaches a predetermined number by repeatedly operating the sub input button SB. Thereafter, when the number of times the sub input button SB has been pressed reaches a predetermined number, the display of the meter is erased, the lever image is displayed, and a display prompting the player to operate the lever SB-3 (in this example, “lever Is displayed!) Is displayed. Thereafter, by operating the lever SB-3, a cut-in image is displayed on the effect display device SG, and a display indicating that the super reach is continued (the super reach second half effect is executed) is displayed. Thereafter, the super-reaching second half production will be started. In the second half of the super reach production, the hidden button production for performing the continuous hitting operation is not executed. In addition, the configuration applicable to the hidden button effect in the same figure is as follows: (1) The big hit expectation degree of the symbol variation being executed differs according to the effect result of the hidden button effect, (2) Result effect of the hidden button effect Depending on the situation, the degree of expectation that the super reach second half production will be executed is different.

  Next, FIG. 78 is an image diagram of a hidden button effect applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. First, a super reach effect is started with a certain symbol variation, and the button image is not displayed. Next, when the sub-input button SB is pressed, a continuous hit button image (meter effect) is displayed as a hidden button effect, and a display that prompts the player to perform a continuous hit operation (in this example, “Let's hit repeatedly !!”) is displayed. Is displayed. Similar to the configuration of FIG. 77, the gaming machine in FIG. 77 has an automatic continuous hitting function. However, in the execution variation of the hidden button effect, even if the player presses the sub input button SB for a long time, the automatic repeated hit effect Is not executed (the player needs to perform the continuous hitting operation himself / herself). Next, the player repeatedly presses the sub input button SB, but the meter is not full and the display of the meter is erased, and the production display device SG produces a failure production (that the meter has not become full. Is displayed). In this example, when the button hitting effect (meter effect) of the hidden button effect fails (when the failure effect is executed), when the button hit effect (meter effect) of the hidden button effect is successful (cut-in effect) Is configured so that the expected degree of jackpot is lower. Although the second half of the super reach can be executed even if the consecutive hit effect in the hidden button effect fails, the second half of the super reach is easier to execute than the failure in the consecutive hit effect in the hidden button effect. Yes. 77 and 78, a button hitting effect (meter display) is generated as a hidden button effect, and the jackpot expectation degree of the symbol variation being executed is suggested only by whether or not the meter is full. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display of the meter is increased step by step when the player operates the sub-input button SB repeatedly. It may be configured to indicate the expected big hit expectation (or the expectation that the second half of the super reach will be executed) depending on how much the meter display increased in Or the expectation of execution in the second half of the super reach will be high). In addition, the display mode is not limited to an effect mode in which the meter display increases. For example, the effect is displayed as a continuous hit effect, and the color of the effect changes step by step (“blue → yellow”). (→ green → red ”).

  Next, FIG. 79 is an image diagram of a hidden button effect applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. First, a super reach effect is started in a certain symbol variation, and the button image is not displayed. Next, when the sub-input button SB is pressed, a continuous hit button image (meter effect) is displayed as a hidden button effect, and a display that prompts the player to perform a continuous hit operation (in this example, “Let's hit repeatedly !!”). Is displayed. Here, the gaming machine in the figure has an automatic continuous hitting function (the same configuration as that of the first modification from the present embodiment), and the player is also able to execute the hidden button effect shown in the figure. However, it is configured such that an automatic repeated striking effect can be executed by long-pressing the sub input button SB (the player may perform a repeated striking operation by himself). In the figure, the case where the player repeatedly operates the sub input button SB is described without parentheses, and the case where the player presses the sub input button SB for a long time is described within parentheses. After that, when the continuous input operation (or long press) of the sub input button SB is started, a button image related to the single button press effect is displayed as a button effect during the meter display, that is, during the button continuous hitting effective period ( The button repeated effect and the single button press effect are executed in an overlapping manner). Thereafter, in a situation where the meter and the button image are displayed, the continuous cut operation is continued (or the long press is continued), whereby the first cut-in effect is executed as a single button press effect ( The button hitting valid period related to the hitting effect continues.) Thereafter, by continuing the continuous operation of the sub input button SB (or by continuing to press and hold), the meter display becomes full, and then the meter display is erased and the lever image is displayed. At the same time, a display that prompts the player to operate the lever SB-3 (in this example, “draw the lever!”) Is displayed. Next, by operating the lever SB-3, a second cut-in effect is displayed, and then the big hit symbol is stopped as a decorative symbol stop symbol. Thus, in the same figure, when the hidden button effect is executed, the button image is displayed while the meter is being displayed (during the button continuous hitting period), and three times with one symbol change. An effect of operating the operation member (sub input button SB or lever SB-3) will be executed (the first button repeated effect and the second button single press effect will be executed, and the third lever effect will be executed) It may be configured not to be executed). In the same figure, since the automatic continuous hitting function can be executed even when the hidden button effect is changed, the player presses the sub input button SB for a long time when the hidden button effect is executed. In the case of continuing, it is configured so that a button repeated effect and a single button press effect are executed (a meter increases and a cut-in effect related to a single button press is executed), and the player You will be able to concentrate on the production.

  Next, FIG. 80 is an image diagram of a hidden button effect applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. The upper part of the figure is a meter image displayed after the operation of the sub input button SB is performed a predetermined number of times or more during the button effective period when the hidden button effect is executed. The left side is when the meter display is lit up to 1 level, the center display is when the meter display is lit up to 4 levels, and the right side display is lit up to 7 levels (full tank). It is a case. After that, when the sub input button SB is operated more than a predetermined number of times, or the button hitting effective period elapses), the display of the meter is deleted, the lever image is displayed, and the operation of the lever SB-3 is performed by the player. A display that prompts the user to display (in this example, “draw the lever!”) Is displayed, and after the symbol variation ends, the decorative symbol stop symbol will be displayed. Expectation of jackpot expectation of symbol change during execution by SB operation or when the meter display (maximum meter display in the corresponding fluctuation that does not increase even if repeated hitting operation) has passed The meter finishes in one stage (expected big hit expectation)> The meter finishes in seven stages (full tank) (expected big hit expectation = medium)> the meter finishes in four stages (expected big hit expectation) = Is configured to be small). As described above, in the same figure, the meter input when the operation of the sub-input button SB is performed a predetermined number of times or when the button repeated effective period has elapsed at the time of execution of the symbol variation in which the hidden button effect is executed. The jackpot expectation degree of the symbol change during execution by the display (display of the maximum meter in the fluctuation that does not increase even if repeated hitting is further performed) tends to be higher as the number of stages where the meter increases is higher (7 stages are higher in jackpot expectation than 4 stages), but the highest jackpot expectation is in one stage where the meter is increasing. In this way, when the performance of the meter is basically increased by continuous hitting operation, if the stage of the meter does not increase at all even if the continuous hitting operation is executed (this is an unexpected development for the player). If the player feels uncomfortable), the jackpot expectation related to the symbol variation will be high, or the symbol variation will be a decisive hit (so-called premier effect). Also good.

  Next, FIG. 81 is an image diagram of a customization guidance screen applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. First, from the upper left of the figure, when a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-game state (non-game period), a player like the upper right is operated by operating the sub input button SB. A selection screen (second customization guide screen) is displayed (setting items that can be set by the player are displayed. In this example, “automatic button operation setting”, “light amount adjustment function”, “volume adjustment function” Can be displayed). While the player selection screen is displayed, the player can select an item to be set by operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB-2, and by operating the sub input button SB, “automatic button operation setting”. The “light amount adjusting function” or the “volume adjusting function” can be adjusted.

  Further, when the “automatic button operation setting” is set by operating the sub input button SB, the automatic button operation setting screen is displayed as the above-described customization execution screen as shown in the lower right row, and the cross key SB- The automatic button operation setting “ON” or “OFF” can be selected by the left and right buttons 2, and the automatic button operation setting “ON” or “OFF” can be determined by operating the sub input button SB. Has been. Similarly, a light amount adjustment function, a volume adjustment function setting, and the like are also displayed as a light amount adjustment screen and a volume adjustment screen, and the gaming machine can be customized. In the same figure, when the sub input button SB is operated while the standby demonstration screen is displayed and when the automatic button operation setting is selected on the player selection screen, the automatic button operation setting screen is displayed. Although it is configured, the present invention is not limited to this, and a menu screen that allows selection of an item whose setting is to be changed from a plurality of items may be displayed. Selection of production, trend of production) Selection of frequency of occurrence of pre-reading production, specific production execution frequency (especially announcement production that suggests the big success expectation of the change other than the hold change production relatively high It is also possible to change the frequency of occurrence of an impact production using a body accessory. In addition, when the execution frequency of a certain effect is increased, the expectation of jackpot when the certain effect is generated decreases, and when the execution frequency of a certain effect is decreased, the jackpot when the certain effect is generated Expectation is structured to increase. In addition, you may comprise so that it can adjust so that a specific effect may generate | occur | produce only when big hit is decided as an effect frequency.

  Next, the lower left column will be described. When the sub-input button SB is operated when the standby demonstration screen is displayed, the automatic button operation setting screen is displayed as the customization execution screen, and the automatic button operation setting is related. Game machine customization is possible. As described above, when the sub-input button SB is operated when the standby demonstration screen is displayed, the player selection screen is not displayed (without the player selection screen), and the customization execution screen is displayed. It is comprised so that. When the standby demonstration screen is displayed, the light amount adjustment screen is displayed by operating the up / down buttons of the cross key SB-2, and the volume control screen is displayed by operating the left / right buttons of the cross key SB-2. (The screen may not be displayed and only the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment may be executed). As described above, in the same figure, the screen display control when the sub input button SB is operated is different between the case where the non-game decorative symbol is stopped and the case where the standby demonstration screen is displayed. It is configured as follows. The configuration in which the screen display control is different when the sub input button SB is operated is not limited to the configuration in the figure, and the player can operate by operating the sub input button SB when the standby demonstration screen is displayed. When the selection screen (second customization guidance screen) is displayed and the non-game decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, by operating the sub input button SB, the customization execution screen is displayed. You may comprise so that the screen display control when the sub input button SB is operated may differ between the case where the non-game decoration symbol is stopped and the case where the standby demonstration screen is displayed.

  Next, FIG. 82 shows the number of types of effects that can be applied to the auto-spanning effect that can be applied to this example (particularly when the auto-striking effect is configured to be executable as in the first modification from the present embodiment). It is an example. As shown in the figure, in this example, the game state in which the automatic continuous hit effect can be executed is a non-time-reduced game state, a time-reduced game state, and a special game is being executed. The three states are compared with the case. In each state, the number of types of effects that can be applied to auto-striking effects (the number of types of auto-striking effects that can be executed) is four in the non-time-reduced gaming state and three in the time-reduced gaming state. There are two types of special games being executed, and there are more types in the non-time-saving game state than in the time-saving game state. In each state, the number of types of effects that can be applied to the automatic continuous striking effect in which the button continuous striking effective period of the automatic repeated striking effect is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (in this example, 5 seconds) may be a non-time-reduced gaming state. There are one type, one type when the time-reduced gaming state is in progress, and two types when the special game is being executed. In addition, the automatic continuous striking effect is successful (successful when the result or display mode satisfying the specific condition is achieved by the automatic repeated striking effect that is executed by long pressing the sub input button SB, and the sub input button SB is long pressed. The number of types of auto-striking effects in which it is deterministic that the symbol variation will be a big hit when the result of the auto-striking effect being executed does not satisfy a specific condition or display mode) There are one type of time-reduced gaming state and two types of time-reduced gaming state, and there are more types in the time-reduced gaming state than in the non-time-reduced gaming state. . In addition, when the auto-spanning effect during the special game is successful (success is achieved when the result or the display mode is satisfied by the auto-striking effect that is executed by long pressing the sub input button SB). Then, it becomes definite that the gaming state after the end of the special game becomes the probability variation gaming state {the time shortening gaming state (when the opening extension function is activated)}. In addition, in the above example, it has a plurality of cut-in effects that can be executed after the end of the effective period of the auto-strike effect, and the plurality of cut-in effects are configured to be classified into success effects and failure effects, The case where the jackpot expectation degree of the symbol variation when the successful effect is executed is illustrated as being higher than the jackpot expectation level of the symbol variation when the failure effect is executed. In addition, it becomes the result which is finally as the production result of the auto-striking effect (for example, it changes in a stepwise manner according to the continuous hitting operation, and changes after the continuous hitting result). The rate at which a display for notifying that the final result is a big hit is higher in the time-reduced gaming state than in the non-time-reduced gaming state.

  In the gaming machine according to this example, the light amount adjustment is not prohibited from the viewpoint of epilepsy prevention (user friendly point of view). The setting (the light level before the power is turned off) is temporarily stored, while the volume setting (the volume level before the power is turned off) may not be temporarily stored (all may be configured to be temporarily stored). ).

  Moreover, in the gaming machine according to this example, a plurality of effect display devices may be provided, such as providing the first effect display device SG and the second effect display device SG-2. The first effect display device SG plays the same role as in the present embodiment, and the second effect display device SG-2 is configured to have a display area smaller than that of the first effect display device SG, and the first effect display device SG. When the standby demonstration screen is displayed, the volume level and the light amount level are always displayed on the second effect display device SG (there is no display because there is no hold). You may comprise so that a hold display may be performed with display apparatus SG-2. The second effect display device SG-2 may be configured to be movable like the movable body accessory YK. In addition, as what is displayed on 2nd production | presentation display apparatus SG-2 during a pattern fluctuation, it is not limited to a hold display, You may display a notice production. In addition, the display of the decorative symbols is always displayed on the first effect display device SG even in a non-game state (except during the display of the standby demonstration screen), and the decorative symbols are displayed on the second effect display device SG-2. Even during the stop, the stop symbol (or hold display) of the decorative symbol is not displayed, and the volume level and the light level are displayed. That is, the display of the decorative symbol is displayed on the first effect display device SG so that the player can visually recognize it in the non-game state, and the volume level is displayed on the second effect display device that does not display the decorative symbol. By displaying the light amount level, a display that is important for the progress of the game can be made easier to see, and a user-friendly gaming machine can be obtained.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present example, the number of game balls displayed on the effect display device SG during the special game as an element that can be changed by the player is paid out by winning the winning prize opening. The number of game balls increased during the special game is changed by subtracting the number of game balls fired by the player during the special game from the number of game balls paid out by winning the winning prize. You may comprise. Specifically, the sub-input button SB or the cross key SB-2 is changed on the customization screen, or when the big hit starts, the big hit, or during a specific symbol change (for example, a symbol change in the time-saving gaming state). It may be configured to be changed by operation. In addition, the number of game balls displayed on the effect display device SG during the special game is set to the number of game balls paid out by winning the prize winning opening, or the game balls paid out by winning the winning prize opening. The administrator may be able to change whether the number of game balls increased during the special game by subtracting the number of game balls fired by the player during the special game from the number (only the administrator may be able to change it) Both the player and the administrator may be changeable). Specifically, the sub-input button SB or the cross key SB-2 may be operated and changed on the management menu screen.

  Next, FIG. 83 is a game flow in this embodiment. Here, a main game flow will be described. First, in the low probability and non-short time (normal mode), a game machine ball is launched aiming at entering the first main game start opening A10 (left-handed), and a game ball is placed in the first main game start opening A10. A game is played by entering the first main game symbol. When the first main game symbol is a big hit (first hit), a big probability that will be low probability and short time (a big hit that will shift to a non-stochastic game state and a reduced time gaming state after the big hit) or high probability and short time Or a big hit (a big hit that will shift to a probability-variable gaming state and a time-saving gaming state after the big hit ends). During a big hit, a game ball is fired on the right side of the board (right-handed), and the game ball is entered into the first big prize opening C10 or the second big prize opening C20. When the jackpot ends, the mission starts after the jackpot ends. The gaming state at this time is either a low probability and a short time or a high probability and a short time, and when the mission is successful, a transition is made to a probability change mode indicating that the probability is high and the time is short. On the other hand, if the mission fails, the time reduction ends, and a transition is made to a latent mode with a low probability and non-time reduction or high probability and non-time reduction. When the big hit is made again from the latent mode, it becomes the same as that at the time of the first hit, and when the latent mode ends, the normal mode with a low probability and a short time is set. In the probability variation mode, the player hits the right to enter the game ball into the second main game start port B10 and plays the game using the second main game symbol. In the second main game symbol, the probability change big hit (big hit with high probability) is made, and when the big hit ends, the probability change mode is set again. On the other hand, when a non-probable big hit (a big hit with a low probability) is reached in the second main game symbol, after the big hit, the mode shifts to a time-short mode with a low probability and a short time. Here, when the time is over (in this example, 100 times), the mode shifts to the normal mode with a low probability and time, aiming again at the first main game start opening A10 (left-handed), and the first main game A game will be played with symbols.

(Summary)
As described above, in this embodiment, the player can select a song during a big hit and during a short time, and the music determination method is different when selecting a song during a big hit and during a short time. Furthermore, the playback start point of the music at the time of music selection is also different, and it is possible to provide an operation mode rich in variations while being the same music selection operation. In addition, even a player who does not select a song can easily enjoy various songs by selecting “Random”.

(Modification)
Here, the structure which can be changed from this embodiment is demonstrated as a modification.
(1) A predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) of the probability variation mode is a stage in which the average variation time is set to be short. In this case, a dedicated BGM may be used, and music selection may be impossible. In this case, it is also possible to configure so that the music can be selected after a predetermined number of times has passed (here, 21 times or more).
(2) In a gaming machine (so-called ST machine) in which the probability variation ends for a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), a variation mode table dedicated to the remaining five times is provided in order to perform special effects during the remaining five probability variations. In this case, the music selection may be impossible. In this case, when combined with (1), the probability change is 1 to 20 times: music cannot be selected, 21 to 95 times: music can be selected, and 96 to 100 times: music cannot be selected.
(3) As a plurality of jackpots, jackpot A: 10 rounds jackpot that can select music, jackpot B: song selection is not possible before promotion, song selection is possible after promotion, jackpot C: jackpot C: song selection is not possible It is good also as a structure provided with 10 round big hit.

(Second Embodiment)
In the present embodiment, the small hit is not provided, but may be provided temporarily. However, with that alone, a winning ball can be obtained by entering the big winning opening C10 during the special game related to the big win. Because it is the main, winning a prize ball by small hits is just a bonus element. Therefore, a configuration capable of acquiring many prize balls by small hits is a second embodiment, and differences from this embodiment will be described in detail below.

  FIG. 84 is a table configuration diagram of the main game symbol lottery according to the second embodiment. The differences from this embodiment are the small hit probability, the big hit symbol, and the variation mode (variation time) at the time of the small hit in the second main game. First, the small hit probability in the second main game is 1004/1024, and the symbol variation on the second main game side is configured to be a small hit with high probability.

  Next, with regard to the jackpot symbol, 5A and 7A are selected on the first main game side, and 5B is selected on the second main game side. Is configured to shift to a probability variation gaming state with a limited number of times (so-called ST). In the special games related to 5A and 5B, 2 round big hits (not shown in particular, but it is difficult to enter the game ball because the special winning opening C10 is opened short), and in the special game related to 7A, 4 rounds A big hit (not shown in particular, but the game winning ball is easy to enter in order to open the big winning opening C10 for a long time) is executed. It should be noted that any jackpot with any jackpot symbol may not be configured to shift to a probability varying gaming state with a limited number of times after the end of the special game, and the probability varying gaming state with the jackpot symbol as in this embodiment. It is good also as a structure from which it shifts to.

  Further, in this example, after the special game related to 7A or 5B is completed, it is configured to be able to shift to a time-saving game state (in this example, particularly, a state in which the auxiliary game time-short flag is on). This example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even in a big hit on the second main game side, the time-saving game state (in this example, particularly indicates a state where the auxiliary game time-short flag is on) You may comprise so that the big hit which does not transfer to may be provided.

  In addition, the variation time on the second main game side is configured such that a relatively short time is determined only in the probability variation game and the time shortening game (high probability and short time). For example, at the time of non-stochastic variation game and non-time reduction game (low probability and non-time short time), or at the time of probability variation game and non-time reduction game (high probability and non-time short time), the second main game side In the case of a small hit, the variation mode is determined from among Bkx (75 seconds), Bky (85 seconds), and Bkz (95 seconds). In this case, since the variation time is relatively long and the variation time is randomly determined from among the three patterns, games other than the probability variation game and the time shortening game (high probability and short time) In the state, even if the player tries to obtain a prize ball by a small hit, the efficiency is low and the game is executed on the first main game side. On the other hand, in the probability variation game and the time shortening game (high probability and time reduction), if the second main game side is a small hit, the variation mode of Bk2 (1 second) is selected uniformly (also, The second main game side wins a small hit with a high probability). With such a table structure, the player executes the game on the second main game side in the probability variation game and the time reduction game (high probability and time reduction), and efficiently obtains a prize ball by the small hit game It becomes possible to do. Even in the case of loss variation, the probability of non-probability variation games and non-time reduction games (low probability and non-time reduction), or probability change games and non-time reduction games (high probability and non-time reduction) are probabilities. The variation mode is selected such that the variation time is relatively longer than that of the variable game and the time reduction game (high probability and short time).

  Next, FIG. 85 is an image diagram of a music selection screen when a small hit occurs in a short time. First, in the upper left figure, a music selection screen is displayed during a short time. Next, when the diagram moves to the upper right figure, the decorative symbol stops at “AAA”, which indicates the occurrence of a small hit. At this time, music selection is also possible. Next, when moving to the lower diagram, one game ball enters the big prize opening when the game ball has entered the big prize opening (the first big prize opening C10 or the second big prize opening C20) opened by the small hit. “+15” indicating 15 balls, which is the number of winning balls when entering, is displayed at the approximate center of the liquid crystal screen. The total acquisition number display has also been updated. Music selection is also possible at this time, and when the small hit ends, the next change is started and the figure returns to the upper left figure. In other words, in the case of a small hit, music selection can be continued, and the selected music is also continuously output. However, when an SE is displayed that indicates that the player has entered the ball together with a display of “+15” when entering the grand prize opening, the volume of the music is lowered and the volume of the SE is emphasized (that is, the volume is increased). , SE> music).

(Third embodiment)
First, the gaming machine according to the third embodiment has a specific area C22 in which a game ball can enter in the second grand prize opening C20. In addition, the gaming machine according to the third embodiment has a configuration (so-called a VST machine, a so-called VST machine, etc.) that enters a specific area C22 during execution of a special game and then enters a probability variation gaming state after the special game ends. It has become a ball machine.

  FIG. 86 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the third embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that the combination of main game symbols that are big hits is different, and the configuration of each variation mode determination table is changed. Of the main game symbols that are big hits, the main game symbols for which a special game that makes it easy for a game ball to enter the specific area C22 are “5A, 7A, 3B, 5B, and 7B”. The main game symbol in which a special game that makes it difficult for a game ball to enter the specific area C22 is executed is “2A”.

  Next, FIG. 87 is a flowchart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 28 in the third embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is Step 1611 (third) and Step 1850 (third), and the purpose thereof is a unit for opening the distribution game (the second big prize opening C20 having the specific area C22). (Game) can be executed. That is, after setting the special game start display instruction command to the sub side in step 1608 or when the special game execution flag is on in step 1610, in step 1611 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M Determines whether the currently executed round is a sorting game execution round (in this example, the second round, the fourth round). In the case of Yes in step 1611 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a distribution game execution process described later in step 1850 (third), and proceeds to step 1634. On the other hand, if No in step 1611 (third), the process proceeds to step 1612.

  Next, FIG. 88 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of step 1850 (third) in FIG. 87 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1852, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the distribution game execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1852, the process moves to step 1866. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1852, in step 1854, the CPUMC of the main control board M indicates that the stopped main game symbol is a long open symbol (the second big prize opening C20 is relatively long in the distribution game execution round). It is a jackpot symbol that is open for time, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 3B · 5A · 5B · 7A · 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1854, in step 1856, the CPUMC of the main control board M uses the long open pattern (for example, 15 seconds open and specified as the open pattern of the second big prize opening C20 having the specific area C22. An opening pattern designed so that the entry into the region C22 becomes deterministic is set, and the process proceeds to Step 1860. In the case of No in step 1854, in other words, if the stop symbol is 2A, in step 1858, the CPUMC of the main control board M uses the short opening pattern as the opening pattern of the second major winning opening C20 having the specific area C22. -(For example, an opening pattern designed to be 0.1 second opening and non-entry into the specific area C22 is determined), and the process proceeds to step 1860. In the third embodiment, the long open symbol on the first main game side is “5A / 7A”, and the ratio selected at the time of the big hit is “524/1024”. The long open symbol on the side is “3B, 5B, 7B”, and the ratio selected at the time of big hit is “1024/1024”, so the second main game side than the big hit on the first main game side It is configured that the second big winning opening C20 has a higher ratio of being long open in the sorting game execution round, that is, it is easier for a game ball to enter the specific area C22 at the big hit.

  Next, in step 1860, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, in step 1862, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the distribution game continuation flag. Next, in step 1864, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second big prize opening C20 with the set opening pattern, and proceeds to step 1866.

  Next, in step 1866, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and determines whether or not a predetermined number (10) of gaming balls have won the second big winning opening C20. . If Yes in step 1866, the process proceeds to step 1870. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1866, in step 1868, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the opening period (set opening pattern) of the second big prize opening C20 has ended. If Yes in step 1868, the process proceeds to step 1870. Next, in step 1870, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second big prize opening C20. Next, in step 1872, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the distribution game execution flag. Next, in step 1874, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has entered the specific area C22 in the execution round of the distribution game. In the case of Yes in step 1874, in step 1876, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change transition reservation flag, and proceeds to step 1878. In the case of No in step 1874, the process proceeds to step 1878. Next, in step 1878, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the round number counter (ends the execution round of the distribution game), and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1634). Even in the case of No in step 1868, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1634).

  Next, FIG. 89 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 of FIG. 87 in the third embodiment. First, the difference from this embodiment is about step 1680 (third), step 1682 (third), step 1653 (third), step 1684 (third), and step 1686 (third). The purpose is to change the upper limit value of the number of times of change in the probability variation game state and the possibility of transition to the probability variation game state depending on whether or not the specific area C22 has entered in the sorting game executed in the third embodiment. It is to let you. That is, when this subroutine is executed, in step 1680 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game probability change transition reservation flag is on. If Yes in step 1680 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability change transition reservation flag in step 1682 (third). Next, in step 1653 (third) and step 1654, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (80 in this example) to the probability variation counter MP51c and turns on the main game probability variation flag. . Next, in step 1684 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) to the limited frequency counter MN52c. Next, in step 1656, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the predetermined number of times A (80 times in this example) to the time-count counter MP52c and proceeds to step 1658, and thereafter in steps 1658 and 1660. The same processing as that of the present embodiment is executed.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1680 (third), in step 1686 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M has a predetermined number of times B (in this example, 50 times) in the time-count counter MP52c. The value is preferably a predetermined number A or less), and the process proceeds to step 1658.

  Here, in 3rd Embodiment, it is comprised so that it may transfer to a time shortening game state after completion | finish of a special game irrespective of the presence or absence of the entrance to the specific area | region C22 during a special game. In addition, when a game ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game, the number of times of change in the time-reduced game state after the special game is the same as the number of times of change in the probability change game state A (In this example, 80 times), and when there is no game ball entering the specific area C22 during the special game, the number of fluctuations that will be in the time-reduced game state after the special game is different from the predetermined number A ( It is configured to be a predetermined number B (50 times in this example) which is a small number. Thus, even if the specific area C22 is not passed during the special game that makes it easy to enter the specific area C22, a certain advantageous period can be provided and the specific area C22 is not passed. Can be expected to prevent the decline of interest. In addition, the variation mode of the main game symbol during the time-reduced gaming state is such that a three-stage limited frequency table (limited frequency table 1, limited frequency table 2 and limited frequency table 3) is used for a predetermined number A of time-reduced gaming states. The main game table 3-2 is referred to in the time-reduced game state of the predetermined number of times B, and a table with different effect contents is also referred to. In addition, the said structure is applied also when the big jackpot symbol that triggered the execution of the special game is the same or different (for example, even if it is a special game triggered by the same jackpot symbol, the execution of the special game The number of time reductions differs depending on whether or not a particular area C22 is entered. Note that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the upper limit number of time-saving games may be determined based on the symbol at the time of big hit (for example, during special games) If the player has not entered the specific area C22, the upper limit number of fluctuations in the time-saving game is determined by the big hit symbol, etc.).

  Next, FIG. 90 is a time chart showing the volume of the BGM during the big hit in the third embodiment. First, at the timing of (1), a V-entry round (a round in which whether or not a game ball enters the specific area C22) provided in a predetermined round (for example, the fourth round) that is a big hit starts. . At this time, the volume of the BGM gradually decreases from the start of the round. Next, at the timing of (2), the ball enters the specific area C22 (V), and SE indicating that the ball has entered is output. At this time, the volume of the SE indicating that the ball has entered the specific area C22 (V) is configured to be larger than the volume of the BGM. When the output of SE indicating that the player has entered the specific area C22 (V) is finished, the volume of the BGM gradually increases and becomes the same as that before the start of the V-entry round. Next, at the timing of (3), the jackpot end demo time is reached. At the big hit end demo time, the volume of the BGM is a little lower. Next, at the timing of (4), when the fluctuation start timing is reached, the volume is further reduced. In other words, when the same music is output during the big hit and during the short time, the volume of the music is “During round> During big hit end demonstration> Fluctuating”. In addition, the volume at the start of the first time-short rotation is the same as the volume during the big hit end demonstration, and the volume at the first time-short rotation start time and the second time-short start time are different (the first time-short first rotation start time). > Time short second rotation start time).

  In addition, it is configured so that the manufacturer logo is displayed and a card discharge warning is issued during the big hit end demo time at the first hit, and the BGM volume is reduced at the big hit end demo time at the first hit. The jackpot after the first round may be configured so that the volume of the BGM (music) does not decrease. Here, the volume of sound (SE etc.) that can be output at the same time as the volume of BGM (music) is summarized. (1) The volume of instruction sound such as SE or “right-handed” sound effects is BGM ( (2) The volume of SE at the time of entering the specific area C22 (V) is larger than the volume of BGM (music) during the big hit, (3) When an error occurs during the big hit For example (for example, power return, door open error, magnetism detection error, radio wave detection error, ball pan full error, etc.), the sound volume other than the error sound (BGM, etc.) is zero. Alternatively, the volume of the error sound can be configured to be larger than the volume of the sound other than the error sound.

(Fourth embodiment)
Next, FIG. 91 is a diagram showing an example of using a button image. When the player can operate the sub input button SB, the sub input button SB can be operated by displaying the button image (operation member display) and the indicator image (gauge display) on the liquid crystal as one image. It suggests. If the button image (operation member display) and the indicator image (gauge display) are stored as separate images, it is necessary to perform control to display two images each time, and the capacity of the image ROM for storing the images is reduced. And an increase in processing load. Therefore, by storing the button image (operation member display) and the indicator image (gauge display) as one image, it is possible to solve these problems. As a specific usage example, as shown in (a) Display other than big hit, when the sub input button SB can be operated only once, the gauge is reduced in the indicator portion according to the effective period. By performing image processing so that the effective period is reduced, it is configured to suggest to the player that the sub-input button SB is repeated many times during the big hit, as shown in (b) Big hit display. When the operation of the button is possible (the button can be repeatedly pressed), one image composed of a button (operation member display) and an indicator (gauge display) is displayed, and image processing is performed so that the gauge decreases. Thus, in either case (a) or (b), it is possible to use one common image (an image composed of an operation member display and a gauge display). Note that these are only examples, and the image of (b) may be displayed even when the hit is not a big hit, suggesting that the sub input button SB can be repeatedly hit, and during the big hit (a) As described above, it may be indicated that the sub input button SB can be operated only once. Further, when the sub input button SB can be repeatedly hit, the effective period may be indicated as shown in (a) in order to indicate the entire effective period. On the other hand, in the display other than the big hit (for example, normal state), there are five types of buttons, i.e., rainbow color>gold>red>green> blue, in descending order of the big hit expectation degree. In the big hit display, only two types of red> blue may be provided in the descending order of probability variation expectation and round promotion expectation. As an example of using the button image of (b), it is particularly effective when the effective period of the button is set at the end of a specific round (for example, at the end of two rounds).

The following configuration is also possible.
(1) An indicator (gauge display) may display 0 in the memory.
(2) The present invention is not limited to an effect that allows the sub input button SB to be repeatedly hit, but is applied to an effect that causes the player to select using the sub input button SB (for example, a character is switched every time the button is pressed). Also good.
(3) It is not limited to an indicator (gauge display), and may be a countdown display using numbers. When this configuration is applied to (b), it is desirable to always display the maximum countdown value or to always display the minimum countdown value.
(4) If the same image composed of buttons (operation member display) and indicators (gauge display) is used in (a) and (b), the display mode of one button (color, size, flashing) , Etc.) may be different.

  In this example, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the volume level adjustment, light quantity level adjustment, or automatic button operation on is not limited to this. A configuration that enables turning off may be applied, or a configuration regarding a presentation mode using the sub input button SB, the cross key SB-2, and the lever SB-3 may be applied. Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of a well-known spinning cylinder game machine.

  First, on a well-known spinning-reel game machine, a main board as a main game control unit that controls the progress of the game, a sub board as a sub game control unit that controls the execution of effects, and main game identification information are displayed. As a main game identification information display unit, a plurality of rows (generally three rows) of reels each having a plurality of pieces of identification information arranged on the outer periphery, and a main game start that can be operated by the player and instructs the start of the game It has a start lever as an instruction device and a stop button as a main game progress instruction device that can be operated by the player and instruct the game progress. The main board has a main game random number acquisition unit for acquiring a main game random number when the start lever is operated, and one or more stop identifications based on the random number acquired by the main game random number acquisition unit. Main game identification information display content determination means for tentatively determining information (for example, display content determination means for internally determining a winning combination such as a small role or a special character), and determination of the main game identification information display content Based on one or a plurality of stop identification information tentatively determined by the means and the operation timing of the stop button, the main stop control information is controlled so as to be fixedly displayed on the reel which is the main game identification information display unit. Game identification information display control means (for example, a reel control means for stopping the reel at a predetermined position based on the internally determined winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed); When a predetermined mode is displayed as stop identification information on a reel serving as a game identification information display unit, special game execution control means (for example, “777 etc.”) that controls to shift to a special game is on a predetermined active line The main game side information for transmitting the information related to the main game random number acquired by the main game random number acquisition means to the sub game control unit side. Transmission control means.

  With respect to the sub game control unit side in the above-described well-known spinning cylinder type game machine, the sub input buttons (sub input button SB, cross key SB-2, and lever SB-3 are collectively referred to as sub input buttons) of this embodiment. It is possible to apply a configuration related to the effect of operating the device. Specifically, when the automatic input effect is executed when the sub input button is continuously pressed, the sub input button starts to be pressed during the automatic continuous acceptance period, and the sub input button is maintained. A configuration in which a repetitive hitting effect is executed from the start timing of the button hitting effective period, and a sub input button operation that is executed when a player operates a sub input button such as a button hitting effect without operating the sub input button. A configuration that can be executed without turning on, a configuration that can execute a hidden button effect, and the like can also be applied to a rotating game machine. In addition, when applied to a rotating type gaming machine, the bet button {mechanism for enabling the input of the number of bets (the number of bets)} is configured to play the same role as the sub input button, etc. A plurality of uses may be set for the mechanism.

  The configurations described in the embodiments and the present specification may be combined. For example, by combining the present embodiment and the second embodiment, small hits frequently occur on the second main game side. In addition, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of selecting music, and by combining this embodiment and the third embodiment, a gaming machine capable of selecting VST and music can be provided.

M main control board,
MP11t-H auxiliary game symbol variation management timer, MP11t-C first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C1 first main game timer, MP11t-C2 second main game timer MP22t-B second main game Start opening motorized component release timer, MP33c winning ball counter MP34t special game timer, MP52c hour / minute counter A first main game peripheral device A10 first main game start port (first main game start port A), A11s first main Game start entrance entrance detection device A20 first main game symbol display device, A21g first main game symbol display unit A21h first main game symbol hold display unit, B second main game peripheral device B10 second main game start port, B11s Second main game start entrance detection device B11d Second main game start entrance electric accessory, B20 Second main game symbol display device B21g Second main game symbol display unit B21h 2nd main game symbol hold display part C 1st and 2nd main game shared peripheral device, C10 1st big prize opening C11s 1st big prize opening prize detection device, C11d 1st big prize opening electric accessory C20 2nd big Winning entrance, C21s 2nd grand prize opening winning detection device C21d 2nd big winning opening electrical equipment, YK movable body accessory H auxiliary game peripheral equipment, H10 auxiliary game start opening H11s auxiliary game start opening entrance detection device, H20 auxiliary Game symbol display device H21g Auxiliary game symbol display unit, H21h Auxiliary game symbol holding display unit S Sub control board, SM effect display control means (sub main control board)
SM21t drawing variation time management timer,
SS effect display means (sub-sub control unit), SG effect display device SG10 display area, SG11 decorative symbol display area SG12 first hold display part, SG13 second hold display part SB sub input button, SB-2 cross key SB-3 lever , HY10t Non-game period measurement timer ME10t Error state holding period timer, D26 Game effect lamp D70 Power saving mode display lamp, D42 Launch handle KH Prize ball payout control board KE Prize ball payout device, MT10 command transmission buffer

Claims (1)

A first start opening where game balls can enter,
A second starting port where a game ball can enter,
An effect display device that displays a predetermined effect as the game progresses;
A speaker that outputs a predetermined production sound as the game progresses;
An operation member operable by a player,
A normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that makes it easier to enter the second starting port than the normal gaming state,
In the specific gaming state, a BGM selection screen for changing the BGM output from the speaker can be displayed on the effect display device,
In a situation where the BGM selection screen is displayed, the BGM output from the speaker can be changed based on the operation member being operated.
In the specific effect period in the specific game state, the BGM output from the speaker can be changed based on the operation member being operated even though the BGM selection screen is not displayed. To play.

Images